Home

UP-3515 Operation-Manual GB

1. 275 Entertainment bill E 275 Scrolling message for pole display occu Mur P sS E MR PME 276 Scrolling message for main display n nbi a a e sand T n DE tea NU ante 276 Eunction menu key eds A S KE DEDE SAR E On com e A EA T 277 Function key text color 277 NONU 278 Receipt report printer DIE TE aka nin eee ETIN SETTE 279 280 Remote printer op IDEE EE C EE EC E ON DEDE ON DO OUE EL 281 BCR SCANNER memet 282 SCALE rr C ILI E M 283 On line a tah Saya urchin tote ds a fans mo c M ai k m a at a a e rej sa i eis au a eid aja E m aya ja m ange atid cle m elas n da ay a soss a e eju 283 Pole display wilds vases ee coe es valle vetus 284 Tax programming mmm 284 Customer code A othe wie Wares onon DON AND DEAD avin DON A OO wave DO One daisies kp Eas OO 285 Customer control programming ARTEREI te destic ran EEOC EE TEE 286 Branch programming order mask PM PR EET 287 Transfer mask order mask
2. 79 HASH TL Hash total max 12 characters 80 HASH Hash total 81 BTTL TL Bottle return total 82 BTTL Bottle return total 83 NET 1 Net 1 Taxable 1 VAT tax 1 84 NET 2 Net 2 Taxable 2 VAT tax 2 85 NET 3 Net 3 Taxable 3 VAT tax 3 86 NET 4 Net 4 Taxable 4 VAT tax 4 87 NET5 Net 5 Taxable 5 VAT tax 5 88 NET6 Net 6 Taxable 6 VAT tax 6 89 SUBTOTAL Subtotal 90 MDSE ST Merchandise subtotal 91 TOTAL Total 92 DIFF ST Difference subtotal 93 NON TURN Non turnover subtotal 94 CHANGE Change 95 CHECK PR English check print 96 DUE Due 97 TIP DUE Tip due 98 BALANCE Balance 99 ITEMS Sales q ty 100 ITEM ST Item subtotal for LINK PLU EAN 101 COPY Copy receipt title 102 G C COPY Guest check copy title 103 B T Bill totalize transfer title 104 B S Bill separation title 105 INTERMED Intermediate GLU reading title 106 BILL Bill on receipt title 107 VIP1 SALE 1 sale title 108 VIP2 SALE VIP2 sale title 109 VIP3 SALE VIP3 sale title 110 WASTE WASTE mode title 111 NEXT P Slip next page 112 AVE 13 CCD CCD 114 CCD DIF CCD difference 115 DIF TL CCD difference total 116 O P Order total Paid total 117 COM AMT1 Commission amount 1 118 COM AMT2 Commission amount 2 119 COM AMT3 Commission amount 3 120 COM AMTA Commission amount 4 121 COM
3. rives rusiarie Meu PEU 230 Credit key eene nennen ener 231 Hotel transfer TREE Erinias 232 Check cashing Ra 232 Customer charge key na Bet RE e pafe S TIE a ata ka dine ri risa PIE one N S 233 Currency exchange key eene 234 Foreign currency zi EE 234 Currency money memes 235 Training text clerk programming Lk PNE Sase ae Gede kadre me era 236 237 Department group text meme 242 PLU group text emen nennen 242 PLU hourly group 2c 243 PLU information text m III enne ene 243 CEP en 244 EP kn APA ank so nose cece 246 ETAT e n a ron 247 Employee on san 248 JOD location table DIL 249 Working time shift eene 249 Contact less key e mue eias Cases Quum alex s Vio red qu Qs uu dis dud Quis uu eee Ese Vna r V emu Dus 250 Prohibition of the contact less ke
4. Text Classification Parameter EXCH 1 Exchange 1 SKIP NOT SKIP DOM CUR1 Domestic currency 1 EX1 CHK Exchange 1 paid by check DOM CUR CHK Domestic currency 1 paid by check EX1 CREDIT Exchange 1 paid by credit DOM CR 1 Domestic currency 1 paid by credit EXCH 2 Exchange 2 DOM CUR2 Domestic currency 2 EXCH 3 Exchange 3 DOM CUR3 Domestic currency 3 EXCH 4 Exchange 4 DOM CUR4 Domestic currency 4 EXCH 5 Exchange 5 DOM CUR5 Domestic currency 5 EXCH 6 Exchange 6 DOM CUR6 Domestic currency 6 EXCH 7 Exchange 7 DOM CUR7 Domestic currency 7 EXCH 8 Exchange 8 DOM CUR8 Domestic currency 8 EXCH 9 Exchange 9 DOM CUR9 Domestic currency 9 Cash drawer CH ID Check in drawer CA CH ID Cash check in drawer CHK CG Check change TICKET Ticket 265 Clerk report format REPORT gt CLERK RPT FORMAT PGM2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the REPORT button to display the menu and touch the CLERK RPT FORMAT button to program details 3 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 3 satisfactorily 4 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Classification Parameter Z1 COUNTER Clerk 21 reset counter SKIP NOT SKIP
5. 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 159 wes E 0151615 O x f 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 ds i13 5 ua NIMES LI 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 cS IBI Id A AJA jofel mt e Ss E192 194 195 1 Hora 19s 299 201 20220 294 205 299 207 12207 Cc 208 a A EIN RISTT U 1 1 1 fA riim 1 237 238 239 209 O 8 JO o p p P UJU U Y 253 mors te e DC Double size character code _ 095 Line feed code Shaded characters are Czech characters The characters A Y 4 of the character list can not be printed they are only for display 201 Basic Instructions This section illustrates the basic programming by using an example of programming for departments Department ARTICLE gt DEPARTMENT PGM1 ARTICLE DEPARTMENT PGM2 H Programming example Procedure 1 Select the PGM2 mode in the mode window The following window is displayed PGM2 MODE 1 READING 2 SETTING 3 D EAN LOAD BACK CLEAR SPACE 2 Touch the SETTING button to perform the programming The following window is displayed 22 MWS CONFIG 16 CUSTOMER 23 VMP CONFIG
6. EN E IED Ver1 01 TH000 15 09 Function bar window Receipt window e Programming screen DZZZZZZZYA SEEDS 01 8 8 3 o ou 2 g 3 E 2885825 a A A s Veri 01 THO0O 15 11 00 e Character entry screen The character entry screen is used when you need to enter text data Screen example TEXT TEXT START END SHIFT ee oo Pan een eee lt EN Ver1 01 000 15 12 08 11 12 H Customer display There are two customer display options available for the UP 3515 The pole type customer display or an integrated type rear display can be installed H Screen save mode The screen save function starts when the POS terminal is left idle for an extended period of time You can program the time for which your POS terminal should keep the normal status before it goes into the screen saver mode If the time has not been preset the screen saver will be started after 100 minutes To exit the screen saver mode touch anywhere on the touch panel a secret code may be required at this time Clerk Keys This POS terminal allows the operator to use the following four clerk identification systems e Contactless clerk keys max 126 clerks e Clerk code entry max 255 clerks e Clerk entry keys max 10 clerks e WMF clerk keys max 127 clerks WMF clerk key is not a
7. pk a 333 Part Names and Functions This chapter describes the part names and functions of this POS terminal External View H Front view Operator display touch panel H Rear view Side cover AC adapter jack Mode switch Plug frame AC adapter plug AC power cord AC adapter Connect the AC power cord to the AC adapter AC power cord Q Open the plug frame and connect the AC adapter plug to the AC adapter jack G Close the plug frame and lock the AC adapter plug to prevent disconnection amp Plug the AC power cord into the wall outlet Mode switch The switch has the position ON 1 and STANDBY 4 Set the mode switch to the ON I position after the terminal has been plugged into the wall outlet The STANDBY W position locks all operations of the POS terminal When you select this position the screen will disappear Power indicator When the mode switch is set to the ON I position with the POS terminal plugged in the power indicator at the lower right corner of the LCD panel will light up When the mode switch is set to the STANDBY W position or the POS terminal is unplugged the power indicator will light out The power indicator will remain on while the display s backlight is off Contactless clerk switch Contactless clerk switch is used with contactless clerk keys Contactless clerk key P
8. etree ttre 95 Discount entries PADAN DON OO cy we Serta alucte delta vals 96 Refund entries esse NA On 97 Return ae menre eens ence 97 Printing of non add code numbers Sei aia sa saws Gc n a DEA EE oun Da ni EUM Es 98 Printing of free text feste dedi ine sts aya e md len wi mia dm nie isa cia a a e e n ka a n a a ay a n a ki aa e mt a e 98 Payment Treatment ANRO DOU PE siaislatean a wroacnta ate o cn aia ate a a uawelaia ERES Miste b a e ste s nin ee SE E DON 99 Tip in entries Ne were FA n a a e a e m n w a e m a m ew ae HS 99 Tip paid entries e ana sates a a a n pk m sas ra On e a aa Gn sa nna pw da disa a UTE 100 Currency exchange mmn 101 Received on account entries HH HH Henne 102 Paid out entries race 104 No sale exchange doter drea voles de duceretur TD An de ar ete
9. 269 Stacked report REPORT gt STACKED REPORT 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the REPORT button to display the menu and touch the STACKED REPORT button to program details 3 Select the REPORT 1 or REPORT 2 PGM2 Text Parameter 1 20 2 20 4 Touch or select the contents number 01 to 20 by using the W or A key and touch the ENTER key to display the report list To delete the report contents select the contents number 01 to 20 by using the or A key touch the DELETE key 5 Select the proper report from the report list When the report with the range data is selected the sub parameters window is displayed enter the range data 6 To finish the programming touch the EXIT key lt Report list gt No Report text Classification Note 01 GENERAL General report 02 DEPT GROUP Full department report Starting dept code ending dept code 1 to 99 03 DEPT GROUP TOTAL Full group total report on departments 04 PLU PLU report by designated range Starting PLU code ending PLU code 1 to 99999 05 COMBO SALES Combo sales report Starting PLU code ending PLU code 1 to 99999 06 PLU GROUP TOTAL Full group total report on PLUs 07 PLU STO
10. Transaction counter Sales total Average of sales amount Time Transaction counter 1 LABOR COSTZ 0 00 14 Q 5867 17 LABOR 32 01 3 69 1 00 41 0 1030 33 LABOR 40 55 2 49 2 00 62 Q 1467 20 LABORS 64 02 4 36 Et n 23 00 52 Q 93 LABORX xm 42 3 214 Employee cost Labor cost Yo Sales total 177 GLU report Xe When you take a Z report Z1 is printed instead of X1 GLU GLU code 1 9999 Range GLUR1001 0001 Clerk code XiPBAL x15 80 PBAL DEPOSIT 0 00 Deposit total DEPO 00 Deposit total GLU 1003 0001 16 50 Em a GLU O06 000 1 transaction was handled by a 22 DEPOSIT 0 00 DEPO 0 00 Z Free GLU code This code has been transferred out GLU 1005 24 BO DEPOSIT 0 00 DEPO 0 00 TOTAL zu 47 80 DEPOSIT x50 00 Total DEPO 10 00 GLU report by clerk X 1 GLU BY CLERK When you take a Z report Z1 is printed instead of X1 Clerk code CLKAOQO 1 CLERK0001 Clerk name Lui 001 GLU code 16 80 PBAL DEPOSIT 0 00 2 4 Deposit total DEPO x0 00 Deposit total GLUR1003 16 50 DEPOSIT 50 00 DEPO 10 00 GLU 1006 viesPBAL x22 70 DEPOSIT 00 DEPO 0 00 ATOTAL
11. Xe 1D 13644 62 CHECK ID 140 85 CA CHK ID 13785 47 CHK CG 7 30 EURO START 01 07 2009 0 00 DAYS TO EURO 10 Date and time setting will be reset after the execution of automatic modification operation and again you can program the date and time for the next automatic modification operation Also you can make the automatic EURO modification operation compulsory When the above mentioned preset date and time has come and also when you start an entry in the REG MGR mode the error message EURO CHANGE ENTRY COMPULSORY will be displayed You cannot start any operation in the REG MGR mode until you make the operation Automatic EURO modification operation 1 Select the X2 Z2 mode 2 Select 8 EURO STATUS from the menu 3 Select the status you want to set B C or D referring to the table on the previous page Touch 1 key to toggle the options Please note that once you set a status you cannot return to the previous status es Important note As for the miscellaneous keys such as and keys and for the HALO setting the automatic conversion will not be made You need to change the rates or amounts in the PGM1 PGM2 mode after the execution of the automatic modification operation for EURO so that they are based on amounts in EURO It is executed some of following operation which is needed for each status 1 Issue general 21 report 2 Issue general Z2 report 3 Clear GT1 GT2 GT
12. 2 00 17 00 PLUOOQ01 ASTE 2 000 Q 18 00 PLUOOOO1 8 0000 76 00 ASTE 1 000 0 9 50 0024 PLUOOOZ4 8 000 0 e 20 1 000 0 38 000 si 80 CONBO COMBO WASTE PLUOOO24 50004 10 00 WASTE 2 000 0 00 COMBO 20 000 Q 22 00 COMBO WASTE 6 000 0 6 60 PLUOOOZ4 6 0000 518 00 WASTE 1 000 0 3 00 COMBO 26 000 2 28 50 COMBO WASTE 6 000 0 6 60 EAN 4003213217654 ITEMO7 29 0000 113 10 HASTE 40000 15 60 6 0000 23 40 4 000 0 15 60 A0 40000 5 60 ITEMO7 11 00 566 30 WASTE 4 000 0 15 60 A01000 3 0000 11 70 Ad2000 5000 519 50 01 4 0000 5 00 ITENO 22 0000 585 80 ASTE 4 000 Q 15 60 01000 2000 35 10 A02000 24000 15 60 ADI 6 0000 3 m E cms 160 PLU code Price level 1 description sales q ty and total Price level 1 waste q ty and total EAN code Price level 1 description sales q ty and total Price level 1 waste q ty and total Add on code 5 digit Add on code 2 digit PLU GROS 242 000 0 31 60 1633 24 Group 8 sales q ty and total DEPT TL 1593 230 Q 100 004 5168 Group 8 label Plus dept total H PLU EAN group total report Ts PLU GROUP TOTAL PLU GR01 938 2300 48 352 2590 99 PLU GRO2 125 000 0 12 64 666 85 PLU GRO3 33 0000 2 494 LB NN EL EE MERCI PLU GR99 37 0000 1 26 66 30 TL 1632 230 Q
13. 2000 CHECK 0000000000435678 CAZCHK 20 00 20 00 106 Service charge When the payment operation is made for sales registrations the service charge amount is calculated and printed You can program a percent rate for calculating the service charge If the percent rate is programmed as 0 the POS terminal does not print any service charge Service charge is available in automatic VAT 1 6 automatic tax 1 6 automatic VAT 1 3 and automatic tax 4 6 system Example Key Operation Display PLU 00002 1 0001 PLU 00003 156 20 6 20 SUBTOTAL PLU00002 CASH_TOTAL 1x1 00 1 00 PLU00003 SER CHRG 0 72 CASH 1 92 TOTAL 2 98 To exampt the service charge touch the REMOVE SERV CHG key before starting payment operation Key Operation Display PLU 00002 PLU 00003 16 20 6 20 REMOVE_SERV CHG PLUDOOOZ CASH TOTAL 1x1 00 1 00 PLUDOOO3 SER CHRG 0 00 CASH 7 20 7 20 107 H VIP sales This function is used for transaction for the important guest who is free of charge In this mode any unit price is not counted VIP SALE 1 through VIP_SALE 3 gt Item entries CASH TOTAL Example Key Operation Display VIP_SALES 1 001 PLU 00002 130 00 0 00 PLU 00003 PLU00002 CASH_TOTAL 1x0 00 0 00 PLU00003 CASH 0 00 0 00 108 Customer Management Your POS terminal can provide the customer management function To enable the customer ma
14. BEST MACHINE SHARP IS THE BEST The programmable number of lines for a message varies according to the following message types e 3 line header message type e Graphical logo only type e Graphical logo and 3 line footer message type e 6 line header message type e 3 line header and 3 line footer messages type e 3 line header message graphical logo and 3 line footer message type e Graphical logo and 3 line header and 3 line footer messages type Please contact your authorized SHARP dealer 272 H Free text MESSAGE FREE TEXT 2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the MESSAGE button to display the menu and touch the FREE TEXT button to display the free text list 1 to TEXT99 3 Touch or select the required free text and enter the free text and touch the OK key Repeat this step 3 satisfactorily 4 To terminate the programming touch the CANCEL or EXIT key Text Parameter Free text nn Max 20 characters Free text for departments PLUs EANs B Validation printing text MESSAGE gt VP TEXT PGM2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the MESSAGE button to display the menu and touch the VP TEXT button to program details 3 Enter the validation printing text and touch the OK key Repeat this step 3 satisfactorily 4 To terminate the program
15. Saa m ksion S 122 WASTE Mode lt 1 23 TRAINING ttt 124 Supervisor Clerk eee eee eee eee eee eee eee ee eee eee terre rere rere eee ee eee eee eee ee er eer er ere errr ee eee eee ee eee ee eee ree eee teeter ere 125 Overlapped Clerk Entry 126 6 Corrections eee ee EE EE eee eee eee eee eee eer reer eee rere ee eee eee eee reer etter eee EN e ee eee eee eee eee teeter EE EE ee reer eee e reer eee eee 127 Correction Of Entries mH 127 Subtotal VOI RAZE OO 129 Correction of Incorrect Entries Not Handled by the Direct Indirect or Subtotal Void Function 129 7 Special Printing Function o Hee 130 Receipt ON OFF eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee teeter er eee eee ee eee eee eee ere ere reer eee eee ee eee eee eee eee eet ee rer eee eee eee eee eee 130 Copy Receipt Printing eee eee eee eee eee eee eee ete eter eee eee eee ee eee eee ee eee teeter eee ee eee eee eee ee eee teeter er tree errr reer 130 Guest Check Copy eee eee eee eee eee eee eee ee etre rere reer eee eee eee ee eee ee eer eter ree eee eee eee ee eee eee ee ree rer ee rere ere ere rere 131 Validation Printing Function 004004000004 e
16. 2 Press code format GERMAN TYPE1 U K FRENCH SWEDEN German 2 1 GERMAN TYPE 1 prefix code 434 439 2 U K prefix code 988 989 3 FRENCH prefix code 378 379 4 SWEDEN prefix code 7388 5 GERMAN TYPE2 prefix code 414 419 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the ARTICLE button to display the menu and touch the PRESS CODE button to display the format list 3 Touch the GERMAN TYPE1 U K FRENCH SWEDEN or GERMAN TYPE2 button to program details 4 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 4 satisfactorily 5 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key GERMAN TYPE1 U K FRENCH SWEDEN GERMAN TYPE2 Text Parameter NORMAL Normal EAN TYPE OF CODE PRESS Press code Price entry method for press code This setting is valid only when PRESS CODE is set for TYPE OF CODE PRICE PRESET Using the EAN preset price ENCODED Using the encoded price COMPULSORY Compulsory entry Label of record in EAN file This setting is valid only when PRESS CODE is set for TYPE OF CODE ARTICLE Prefix article code Select this option when you want to summarize the sales of items having press codes by each item PREFIX Prefix only Select this option when you want to summarize the sales of items having press codes by category LABEL TYPE 220
17. Credit customer taxable 1 subtotal Credit customer VAT 1 total Credit customer tax total Net sales total without tax Turnover amount per table Order total used guest check Turnover amount per guest Order total guest counter Turnover amount per bill Order total new check q ty Item q ty per guest dept q ty guest q ty Item q ty per bill dept q ty new check q ty Average of item amount dept amount dept q ty 170 H All clerk report 1 When you take a Z report Z1 is printed instead of X1 X ALL CLERK 110001 CLERK0001 The subsequent items are printed out in the same format as in the individual clerk report from the clerk 1 In the all clerk report the total sales of all clerks are also printed 171 Individual clerk report In case of clerk only system 172 X 1 IND CLERK CLKAQQOQ 1 CLERKOOOT ORDER TL 16468 85 COH SALI 229 50 COH AMT 5 89 COH SAL x39 90 COH AMT 0 80 SAL3 x42 40 COH 2 12 COH SAL4 347 60 CON ANT4 x2 86 COH SAL5 x32 50 ANTS 2 60 COH SALG 95 20 6 66 CON SAL 110 50 COM ANT 6 63 CON SALE 40 60 ANTS 2 84 COM SALO 16 80 COM 34 COM T
18. DRAWER OPEN YES Opens the drawer NO Disables the drawer opening Either change enable or disable can be selected for each credit key CHANGE DUE DISABLE Disables change calculation ENABLE Enables change calculation VP COMPULSORY Compulsory validation printing NON COMPULSORY Non compulsory validation printing CLOSED TRANSACTION Retention on closed transaction file RETAINED NO RETAINED 231 Hotel transfer MEDIA gt HOTEL TRANSFER PGM2 1 2 3 4 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming Touch the MEDIA button to display the menu Touch the HOTEL TRANSFER button to program details Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 4 satisfactorily 5 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key oo Text Parameter TEXT Description for the hotel transfer Up to 12 characters can be entered COMPULSORY Makes bill printing compulsory BILL PRINT NON COMPULSORY Makes bill printing non compulsory M Check cashing MEDIA gt PGM2 1 2 3 4 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming Touch the MEDIA button to display the menu Touch the CA CHK button to program details Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the
19. From type A selectable gt Type B or D From type B selectable t Type D From type selectable Type D Type B Type C Type D General Z1 report ISSUE ISSUE ISSUE General Z2 report ISSUE ISSUE ISSUE GT1 GT2 GT3 memory CLEAR CLEAR Exchange amount printing for total and change YES YES NO Exchange amount printing for total validation print YES YES NO Exchange calculation method DIVISION MULTI MULTI Domestic currency symbol EURO EURO Domestic TAB 2 2 Conversion of preset prices of Dept PLU EAN YES YES The current Exchange1 currency descriptor EURO domestic currency symbol The current Exchanger1 TAB domestic TAB The marked items is remaining the current data The preset rate of the EXCH1 key is applied as the conversion rate and the calculation method is set to division When the conversion has been made the message PRICE CONVERTED is printed on the report 329 Setting the date and time when the automatic EURO modification operation should be executed To certainly execute the automatic modification operation you can program the scheduled date and time to execute the automatic EURO modification operation From ten days before the preset date the remaining days are printed at the bottom of the daily full resetting report
20. Key Operation Display 1001 GLU 0 PLU 00002 181 00 1 00 PLU 00003 1 100002 NBAL 1x1 00 1 00 PLUDODO3 2 00 e Additional ordering CANCEL To cancel OPENED GLU 1 Select the GLU code A gt ENTER Touch the GLU code Enter the GLU code ENTER GlUcode __ IE Guest no entry Item entries 1 to 9999 9 max 2 digits NBAL gt G C RCPT 2 FINAL gt SLIP gt XXXXXX gt RA 4 Payment operations gt VP When paid in full settlement 1 The guest number refers to the number of people in the party When the cover count entry is compulsory enter the guest number max 2 digits and touch the ENTER key When it is non compulsory enter the guest number and touch the GUESTIt key To correct the number of guests re enter a number and touch the GUEST key 2 This is the optional function Temporary finalization You can temporarily finalize a guest check by touching the NBAL or FINAL key It is recommended to use the NBAL key to temporarily finalize a guest check when printing is not desired and to use the FINAL key when printing the current balance including tax is desired The guest check however is still open This means you can still make additional orders to it Key Operation Display 1001 GLU RLUr1001 001 CASH TOTAL 100003 1x2
21. L5 LB LT L8 L9 nece dU _ ocu OE MUERE 130 131 132 Report type Key no PLU level PLU code 321 On line configuration PGM2 mode 3PGM2 ONLINE PRESET TERHINAL No 000001 MODEM CONTROL 00 g START CODE 002 END CODE 013 TIME OUT 007 OPEN STORE CLOSE STORE H VMP configuration PGM2 mode PGM2 VMP PRESET PASSWORD 0000 VMPl PASSWORD 0000 VMP2 PASSWORD 0000 VHP3 PASSWORD 0000 VHPI ID 0000000000 ViP ID 0000000000 VAP3 ID 0000000000 ROM version PGM2 mode PGM2 VERSION IPL Version 0 1 UP 3515 PROGRAM Version UP 3515V Ver1 01 R3808 TEXT Version Text V1 00 SYSTEM Version System VI 00 FPGA Version FPGA Ver 15 322 Data Saving or Loading SD Card The POS terminal data can be saved to the SD memory card and the programming data can be loaded from the SD memory card To use the SD card function select the SD CARD mode in the mode selection window and perform the following operations Inserting and Removing an SD Memory Card The SD card slot is located on the left side of your POS terminal and has a side cover Inserting an SD memory card Insert an SD memory card into the SD card slot with the printed SD logo facing upwards Push the card in steady with a finger until it clicks and release it slowly Removing the SD memory card Push the card in gently with a f
22. PLU 00011 100011 CASH_TOTAL PLUOOO31 PLUOO033 PLU00008 CAH 6 60 6 60 50 PLU menu keys categories Items can be categorized into PLU menu keys for ease of registration A PLU menu key can contain both PLU items and other PLU menu keys This can make PLU menu tree of choices When the item direct PLU key is programmed within the PLU menu key touch the corresponding PLU menu key main PLU menu key then select the item or sub PLU menu key Example DRINK gt WINE gt WHITE NICE WINE Example DRINK WINE ROSE GREAT WINE Example DRINK BEER LIGHT NICE BEER Main PLU Sub PLU Item menu key menu key 51 PLU level shift for direct PLUs This shift can double or triple the number of direct PLUs on your POS terminal without adding additional direct PLU keys You can use direct PLUs in ten levels by utilizing the PLU level shift number key LEVEL or the PLU level shift keys LEVEL1 through LEVEL10 Level key shifts the PLU level from the other nine to the required level The normal level is the level 1 You must program your terminal in the PGM mode to select one of the two PLU level shift modes automatic return mode and lock shift mode and decide whether to allow PLU level shift in both the REG and MGR modes or in the MGR mode alone The automatic return mode automatically shifts the PLU level back to leve
23. TIP PAID 10 1000 HOTEL TRANS 10 518 70 CASH 97 0 652 43 CASH2 90 10839 CASH3 20 955 10 CASH 7Q 88 20 5 30 10 30 50 1531 CHECKS 1Q 9 90 CREDITI 20 3800 CREDITS 20 39 30 CHARGE BQ 1975 41 EXCH 10 50 00 DON CURT 32 24 n 150 Deposit counter and total Cash tip counter and total Non cash tip counter and total Tip paid counter and total Hotel transfer counter and total Cash counter and total Cash 2 counter and total Check sale counter and total Credit 1 sale and tendering counter and total Charge counter and total Exchange 1 cash counter and total EXCH9 10 00 DOK CURS x30 02 iiec ID 5490 69 CHECK ID 274 11 CA CHK ID 5764 80 CHK CG 34 10 TICKET 5 60 e Sample Z report 21 GENERAL 21 0002 GT1 00000013784 68 GT2 00000019286 50 00000005501 82 BAL 00000000201 50 TR 00000000004 00 DEPT GROUP The subsequent printout occurs the same format as the sample 1 report Cash in drawer Check in drawer Cash check in drawer Change total for check tendering Ticket total for change due Reset counter Net grand total GT2 GT3 Grand total of plus registration Grand total of minus registration Order paid total Grand total of training mode r
24. CREDIT CUSTOMER ADVANCE ORDER 2 Touch the NEW key the following window is displayed To cancel the operation touch the CANCEL key DELIVERY INFO 3 Enter each item DATE TIME and touch the ENTER key 4 Perform the sales registration entry New advanced orders must be temporarily closed with the NBAL or FINAL key When the purchase order date comes finalize them by cash check or credit tendering 91 e Additional ordering Procedure 1 Enter the customer code CREDIT ORDER The order record is appeared Skip to the next step 2 If the customer is selected from the list touch the CREDIT ORDER key without a customer code to display the list Then select the customer and touch the ENTER key The order record is appeared Skip to the next step 2 To cancel the operation touch the CANCEL key 2 Select the order record and touch the ENTER key to display the record To cancel the operation touch the CANCEL key 3 Perform the sales registration entry To correct the DATE TIME touch the CORRECT ORDER key The confirmation window YES NO is displayed Then select YES The following display is displayed DELIVERY INO Enter each item DATE TIME and touch the ENTER key 92 e Delete the order record Procedure 1 Enter the customer code CREDIT ORDER The order record is appeared Skip to the next step 2 If the customer is selec
25. GR DISC SHIFT 1 SUBTOTAL PLUOOQ03 GROUP_DISC 1 SUBTOTAL 2 00 CASH_TOTAL 10 00 0571 0 20 CASH 1 80 1 80 121 Bonus points Customers can get redeemable bonus points for their purchases There are the following two types of bonus points e Bonus points to be given for purchasing specified PLU EANS e Bonus points to be given for purchasing more than the specified amount For the former type the number of bonus points to be given can be programmed in the PLU EAN article programming For the latter type it can be programmed in the bonus point table In the bonus point table you can also program the discount amount redeemable for the programmed number of bonus points Example Bonus point table Amount 1 00 1 point Amount2 2 00 2 points Amount3 5 00 5 points Amount4 10 00 10 points PLU code 1 2 points Key Operation Print ese 1 3 20 83 20 PLU 00002 PLWOD001 CASH TOTAL 1 4 50 4 50 00002 CASH 7 70 BONUS POINTS 7 e Redemption of bonus points Customers can redeem their accumulated bonus points for discounts Touch the POINT REDEMP key at any time before payment operation Procedure POINT REDEMP FT Points max 7 digits ADD gt OK or Points max 7 digits POINT REDEMP Redeemed points 10 Redeemed amount 1 00 Key Operation Print PLU 00001 1 P
26. PLU_EAN For open and preset type open price entry Selling X QTY Base X QTY Unit price AMOUNT PLU code PLU_EAN For open and preset type preset price entry Selling q ty gt X QTY Base q ty X QTY PLU code PLU EAN e Selling q ty Up to 4 digits integer 3 digits decimal e Base qty Up to 2 digits integer e When you use a programmed base qty skip the base q ty entry Base q ty X QTY 35 e EAN entries By scanning EAN code Selling q ty X QTY Base q ty X QTY 69 Scan EAN code By EAN code entry Selling qty X QTY Base q ty gt X QTY EAN code PLU_EAN e Selling q ty Up to 4 digits integer 3 digits decimal e Base q ty Up to 2 digits integer e When you use a programmed base qty skip the base q ty entry Base q ty X QTY e When you enter or scan an undefined code if the terminal is programmed for the learning function as yes you are required to enter its unit price and the associated department Undefined EAN entry Unit price gt ENTER Dept code ENTER Delete no delete selection ENTER eu Key Operation Display 2 X QTY 10 X QTY 650 Department 6 001 8 X QTY 5 X QTY 600 AMOUNT 5 DEPT PLUOOOOL 6 X QTY 2 PLU 00001 2x8 1 00 0 25 2 X QTY 5 X QTY 860 AMOUNT PLU 00001 PLUOOOOI 2 X QTY 8 X QTY 1 PLU_EAN 3x4 8 70 6 53 3 X QTY 4
27. Scale table ARTICLE gt SCALE TABLE PGM2 Scale table no 1 digit 1 to 9 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the ARTICLE button to display the menu and touch the SCALE TABLE button to display the scale table list 3 Touch the scale table number button to program the tare weight 4 Enter the tare weight and touch the ENTER key 5 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter WEIGHT Tare weight max 4 digits 0 to 9 999 kg or 0 to 99 99 Ibs When the DEL key is touched on table number selection menu the table is deleted PLU EAN stock ARTICLE PLU EAN STOCK PGM2 or PGM1 PLU EAN stock max 7 digits 1 Select the PGM1 or PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the ARTICLE button to display the menu and touch the PLU EAN STOCK button to display the operation menu over write addition or subtraction To create the new stock select the over write operation 3 Touch the OVER WRITE ADD or SUB button to program details 4 Touch or enter the PLU EAN code and touch the ENTER key to program the stock 5 Enter the stock data to over write addition subtraction and touch the ENTER key 6 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key OVER WRITE Text Parameter CURRENT STOCK Current stock displa
28. 12 INHIBIT san 13 INHIBIT 235 14 INHIBIT ae 15 INHIBIT Report type Function menu key no Menu title Touch key no Touch key text Key no 315 H Department group PGM2 mode PGMZx DEPT GROUP GROUPI GROUPI GROUP GROUP GROUPS GROUPS GROUP4 GROUP4 GROUPE GROUPS GROUPS GROUPS PLU group PGM2 mode PGHZx PLU GROUP PLU GROO PLU GROO PLU 5801 PLU GRO1 PLU GRO PLU GRO2 PLU GROS PLU GROS PLU 0895 PLU 0895 PLU 6896 PLU GRO PLU 0897 PLU 0498 PLU GROS PLU 6898 PLU 0894 PLU hourly group PGM2 mode 2 PLU HOURLY GROUP HOUR GRI HOUR GRI HOUR GR2 HOUR GR2 HOUR GR3 HOUR GR3 HOUR GR4 HOUR GR4 HOUR GRO HOUR GRO 316 Report type Function text default Text preset Report type Function text default Text preset Report type Function text default Text preset Message PGM2 mode 2 PG MESSAGE RECEIPT LOGO SHARP PRESENTS THE BEST MACHINE SHARP IS THE BEST FREE TEXT 01 TEXTO1 99 TEXTS9 TEXT FOR DEPOSIT ONLY BILL TEXT BILL FOOTER PAYEE NAME E BILL MESSAGE SCROLL POLE DISP SCROLL HAIN DISP Report type Receipt logo text Free text VP text Bill text Bill footer Payee name for English check Entertainment bill message Scrolling message for pole display
29. Deposit RA Received on account 2 Received on account2 RA Discount for received on account RA Percent calculation for received on account xpo Paid out 2 Paid out2 SCM Starting cash memory SCM Starting cash memory SCM TTL Starting cash memory total SER CHRG Service charge CASH TIP Cash tip NOCA TIP Non cash tip TIP PAID Tip paid H TRANS Hotel transfer CASH Cash CASH2 Cash2 CASH3 Cash3 CASH4 Cash4 CASH5 Cash5 CHECK Check CHECK2 Check2 CHECK3 Check3 CHECK4 Check4 CHECK5 Check5 CREDIT1 Credit1 CREDIT2 Credit2 CREDIT3 Credit3 CREDIT4 Credit4 CREDIT5 Credit5 267 Text Classification Parameter CREDIT6 Credit6 CREDIT7 Credit7 CREDIT8 Credit8 CREDIT9 Credit9 CHARGE Charge EXCH 1 Exchange 1 DOM CUR1 Domestic currency 1 EX1 CHK Exchange 1 paid by check DOM CUR CHK Domestic currency 1 paid by check EX1 CREDIT Exchange 1 paid by credit DOM CR 1 Domestic currency 1 paid by credit EXCH 2 Exchange 2 DOM CUR2 Domestic currency 2 EXCH 3 Exchange 3 DOM CUR3 Domestic currency 3 EXCH 4 Exchange 4 DOM CUR4 Domestic currency 4 EXCH 5 Exchange 5 DOM CUR5 Domestic currency 5 EXCH 6 Exchange 6 DOM CUR6 Domestic currency 6 EXCH 7 Exchange 7 DOM CUR7 Domestic currency 7 EXCH 8 Exchange 8 DOM CUR8 Domestic currency 8 EXCH 9 Excha
30. For EAN item entry you cannot enter NON PLU type EAN code and press code e Global type This function is convenient for matching several PLU EAN items and selling them in a lump e g value meal etc Operation is the same as for normal PLU EAN The promotion table consists of the text for the table a maximum of 25 objected items selected from PLU EAN department or group trip level the number of entries to be satisfied promotion type and promotion detail The promotion detail depends on the promotion type In the example below amount discount is used as the promotion type The programmed promotion entry will be made under the following condition e The total quantity of the objected items meet the trip level programmed in the promotion type Objected items of table no 1 Item A 2 30 Item B 3 10 Item C 2 50 Trip level 3 Promotion type Amount discount Promotion detail Discount amount 1 00 Sale 1 Sale 2 Item A 2 30 Item C 2 50 Item B 3 10 Item C 2 50 Item C 2 50 Item C 2 50 Subtotal 7 90 Subtotal 7 50 Discount 1 00 Discount 1 00 Total 6 90 Total 6 50 Gu In the case of Sale 1 above Key Operation Display Treated as 2 30 item PLU 00040 001 Treated as 3 10 item PLU 00041 18 10 3 10 Treated as 2 50 item PLU 00042 PLUOOOAL CASH_TOTAL 1x2 90 2 90 PLU00042 1 PROMO 1 1 00 CASH 6 90 6 90 42 e Individual type This func
31. RECEIPT PRINTER BILL PRINTER by using the LIST key Then touch the CONTINUE or ENTER key to print the bill To cancel the operation touch the CANCEL key After the bill printing the message Delete is displayed to delete the printed bill data select 1 YES Key Operation Print CUST_BILL 10 01 2008 0800000000075 ENTER 0001 CLERKOOO1 0270 12 50 221208 ENTER 251208 ENTER BILL Select Receipt PRINTER 0800000000075 NANE2 CONTINUE ADDR2 10 01 2008 12 04 CHARGE 1 00 1 1 00 1 00 PLUOQOOS The bill print processing To delete the data select 1 30 00 To keep the data select 2 NO R 30 00 01 01 2008 10 01 2008 CHARGE 29 00 114 Employee Function You can use the following functions by using employee codes Clerks or managers can be signed on by entering employee codes or they can be signed on by using employee cards To use an employee card you need a magnetic card reader MCR Contact your authorized SHARP dealer Use the following procedures Procedure e Clerk sign on EMPL gt Reading an employee card gt XXXX Secret code ENTER gt EMPL Employee code max 10 digits ENTER Employee code max 10 digits EMPL In the case of Contact less clerk key system sign on cannot be done by this procedure e Manager sign on EMPL Reading an empl
32. open only type Unit price Direct PLU key For open and preset type open price entry Unit price AMOUNT Direct PLU key For open and preset type preset price entry Direct PLU key e Open unit price Within the programmed unit price e PLU code entries For preset only type PLU code PLU EAN For open only type Unit price AMOUNT gt PLU code PLU_EAN For open and preset type open price entry Unit price AMOUNT PLU code gt PLU_EAN For open and preset type preset price entry PLU code PLU_EAN e PLU code max 5 digits e Open unit price Within the programmed unit price Key Operation PLU 00001 570 PLU 00002 860 AMOUNT PLU 00001 1 PLU EAN 600 AMOUNT 3 PLU EAN CASH TOTAL 30 00001 1x1 00 PLUOOOOI 1x6 00 PLU00003 CASH TOTAL 1 00 6 00 22 30 22 30 e EAN entries Procedure By scanning EAN code 69 Scan EAN code By EAN code entry EAN code PLU_EAN e EAN code max 13 digits 5 digits add on code e When you enter or scan an undefined code if the terminal is programmed for the learning function as yes you are required to enter its unit price and the associated department Undefined EAN entry Unit price ENTER Dept code ENTER Delete no delete selection ENTER Key Operation Display 490178043
33. 17 ORDER MASK SETTING 1 ARTICLE 8 TERMINAL 2 DIRECT KEY 9 DATE TIME 3 FUNCTIONS 10 OPTIONAL 11 REPORT 18 BACKUP SEND 5 TRAINING 19 BACKUP RECEIVE 12 MESSAGE 13 FUNCTION KEY 20 ONLINE CONFIG 7 PERSONNEL 14 DEVICE CONFIG 21 INLINE CONFIG B To return to the home screen of programming 202 3 Touch the ARTICLE and DEPARTMENT button to program the department and select the desired department and touch the ENTER key DEPARTMENT L 7 02 DPT O2 03 DPT D3 04 DPT O4 05 DPT OS 06 DPT OG 07 DPT O7 08 DPT D8 09 DPT O9 10 DPT 10 11 DPT 12 DPT 13 DPT 14 DPT 15 DPT 16 DPT 17 DPT 18 DPT 19 DPT 20 DPT 20 4 Select the programming items and set the proper data PRICE GROUP No DESCRIPT KEY TEXT KEY COLOR ENTRY TYPE COMMISSION No COPY PASTE OUTPUT KP No 1 OUTPUT KP No 2 RECEIPT PRINT SIF SICS NORMAL RECEIPT TYPE PRINT ON CLK YES ITEM VP NON COMPULSORY HALO 18 SCALE ENABLE PAGE 01 03 5 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key 203 Programming function key RECORD DELETE BACK SPACE COPY PAGE 1 l PAGE 10 ENTER EXIT CLEAR LIST NEXT PREVIOUS TEXT ENTRY LIST MENU REG MENU SELECT SCREEN MOV WINDW PAGE_UP PAGE_DOWN v a TEXTCOPY PASTE 204 Used to delete the data or item Backs up the cursor for deleting the character or figur
34. 8 0 10 40 PLU00025 8 0000 25 60 WASTE 1 000 Q 3 20 COMBO 20 000 Q 95 00 COMBO WASTE 0 PLUOOOZS 11 0000 36 30 WASTE 1 000 0 3 30 COHBO 26 000 Q 33 80 COMBO WASTE 6 000 0 7 80 Total for combo meal EAN sales PLU code PLU range Price level 1 description sales q ty and total Price level 1 waste q ty and total Price level 1 combo sales q ty and total Price level 1 combo waste q ty and total 157 TOTAL LI 24 000 0 WASTE 3 000 Q COMBO 150 000 0 COMBO WASTE 36 000 0 2 13 000 Q WASTE 3 000 Q COMBO 69 000 0 COMBO WASTE 21 000 L3 17 000 Q WASTE 2 000 COMBO 93 000 0 COMBO WASTE 21 000 Q 458 30 9 60 213 70 52 40 122 90 27 70 gt Total for price level 1 PLU EAN report by associated department 158 1 PLU BY DEPT When you take a Z report Z1 is printed instead of X1 Description of associated dept Associated dept code DPLOT D01 7 PLU 00001 PLUOOO01 139 000 Q 1164 84 WASTE 2 000 0 17 00 00001 8 0000 72 00 ASTE 2 000 0 18 00 00001 8 0000 76 00 WASTE 1 000 0 9 50 P 00002 PLUOOOO2 305 230 Q 4305 77 STE 2 000 4 20 PLUOOOO2 5 0000 11 00 WASTE 2 000 0 4 40 PLU code Price level 1 description sales q ty and total Price level 1 waste q ty and total Price level 1 combo sales q ty and total Price level
35. Date of the last access Year Month programmed period 1 Example Date of the deleting 1 to 31 8 2008 Period 12 months Customer Date of the last access Customer A 1 to 30 6 2007 Deleted Customer B 1 to 30 7 2007 Deleted Customer C 1to 30 8 2007 gt Kept intact 286 Branch programming order mask ORDER MASK gt BRANCHES PGM2 Branch number max 8 digits 1 to 99999999 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the ORDER MASK button to display the menu and touch the BRANCHES button to display the branch numbers list 3 Select or enter the branch number and touch the ENTER key to program details 4 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 4 satisfactorily 5 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter BRANCH NAME Branch name Up to 16 characters can be programmed Transfer mask order mask ORDER MASK gt TRANSFER MASK PGM2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the ORDER MASK button to display the menu and touch the TRANSFER MASK button to program details 3 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 3 satisfactorily 4 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT
36. NO Does not print item code on KP PRICE ON KP YES Prints unit price on KP NO Does not print unit price on KP AMOUNT ON KP YES Prints amount on KP NO Does not print amount on KP GUEST ON KP YES Prints guest on KP NO Does not print guest on KP YES Prints quantity when quantity is 1 TY 1 ON KP i NO Does not print quantity when quantity is 1 Exchange1 amount print for total and change TOTAL amp CHANGE DOMESTIC Displays in domestic currency only WITH EX1 Displays both in domestic and EX1 currencies Exchange1 amount print for payment VP PAYMENT VP DOMESTIC Displays in domestic currency only WITH EX1 Displays both in domestic and EX1 currencies MAXIMUM TICKET Maximum number of ticket issuing 1 to 99 15 NON PAY CUST REP Non payment customer report format DETAIL Detail data CHARGE Charge amount data UNIT PRICE PRINT NO Does not print unit price on the receipt 1 line printing YES Prints unit price on the receipt 2 line printing Except when special entries such as split pricing entries scale entries etc are entered 258 Display selection OPTIONAL gt DISPLAY SELECT 2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the OPTIONAL button to display the menu and touch the DISPLAY SELECT button to program details 3 Touch the required programming item and enter or select ea
37. PLU HENU KEY Report type 01 PLU MENUO1 1000 00055 P 00056 07 PLU MENUO 0 00 1 P 00372 00422 00423 Scale table PGM2 mode Menu key no Menu title Menu item Report type PGMZ SCALE TABLE H1 0 725 H2 1 350 3 1 235 4 0 000 5 0 000 6 0 000 7 0 000 8 0 000 9 0 000 Scale table no Tare weight 303 H Happy hour PGM2 mode PGN2 HAPPY HOUR Report type SFTI 4 00 11 00 SLI MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN Start time End time Shift level Day of week 1 Enable 0 Disable FT 0 00 0 00 511 HON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN 1111111 SFT8 0 00 0 00 SLI a TUE k a mi kl W SFT9 0 00 0 00 SL1 MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN 1111111 Function groups PGM1 or PGM2 mode PGM2 FUNCTIONS Report type Function text lt 1 L Sign plus minus 2 0 70 Amount S L18 HALO 0 85 b di Type ltem S L18 S Subtotal m 5 ki R Received on account 6 0 00 I L18 27 0 00 I L18 38 0 00 I 18 29 0 00 R L18 x1 10 00 ste S L100 00 2 5 00 S L100 00 X3 7 50 5 1100 00 8 00 5 1100 00 x5 6 00 I L100 00 46 4 50 I L100 00 aae e len 304 c ek se NEN 8 00 I L100 00 8 6 50 I L100 00 9 7 00 R L100 00 00541
38. Scrolling message for main display 317 Tax PGM2 mode 3PGM2 Report type Tax no TAXI 7 5000 X Rate TAX2 3 0000 TAX3 4 0000 X TAM 5 0000 TAKS 2 0000 TAX6 3 0000 X Auto menu PGM2 mode PGH2 AUTO MENU Report type AUTO menu no AUTO MENUI AUTO MENJI Text 01 Automatic sequencing key no 02 AUTO 3 AUTOS un 04 INHIBIT 05 INHIBIT 06 INHIBIT 07 INHIBIT 08 INHIBIT 09 INHIBIT 10 INHIBIT 11 INHIBIT 12 INHIBIT 13 INHIBIT 14 INHIBIT 15 INHIBIT AUTO MENUG MENUG 01 INHIBIT 02 INHIBIT 03 INHIBIT 04 INHIBIT 05 INHIBIT 06 INHIBI 07 INHIBIT 08 INHIBIT 09 INHIBIT 10 INHIBIT 11 INHIBIT 12 INHIBIT 13 INHIBIT 14 INHIBIT 15 INHIBIT 318 H Auto key sequence PGM2 mode PGH2Z AUTO KEY SEQUENCE Report type 0 1 Automatic sequencing key no MODE 2 ENTER oo gt Key operation 0 ENTER 1 ENTER _ 02 yp E Nd tas 99 Customer PGM2 mode 3PGM2 CUSTOMER Report type 0800000001 232 Customer code 5 Customer ADDR 5 Customer address 771 Price level 0 6 PO Automatic group discount no 0 10 Customer control PGM2 mode 3PGM2 CUSTOMER PROG Report type Limit of charge amount 99999999 99 Non accessed customer delete period Branche
39. 03 07 270 551 65 30 07 37 Q 436 63 31 07 00 688 05 336 Q 6496 93 Employee code Range Employee name Date Over time Hour Over time cost When you take a Z report Z2 is printed instead of X2 Date Guest q ty Sales total Guest total Net amount total 185 Customer sales report 1 and 2 in 72 mode e You can print detailed or total sales information on customer sales report Select DETAIL or TOTAL in FUNCTION SELECT2 menu e In Z2 mode you can select customer sales report 1 or customer sales report 2 Customer sales report 1 allows you to reset charge total of each customer date and sales items Customer sales report 2 allows you to reset sales quantity total charge total of each customer date and sales items 186 xs CUSTOMER SALES 0000000000001 9999999999999 0000000110001 Customer 110001 ADDRESS 1 VAT ID 1 90 220 71 CHARGE 197 41 28 01 2008 1 08 ix 2 10 2 10 PLU00002 1 2 20 2 20 __ PLUOO002 TAXI ST 1118 70 VAT 1 8 28 110 42 TAX6 ST 100 30 VAT 6 1 94 NET 6 98 36 CHARGE 4197 41 0000000123456 EAST STREET VAT ID 2 2 20 CHARGE 0 00 10 01 2008 11 47 x 1 1 00 000001 1 1 00 1 00 PLUOO002 CHARGE 50 00 When you take Z report Z2 is printed instead of X2 Range Customer code Name Address VAT ID Sales q ty and tot
40. 10 00 GDI ST L100 00 00542 5 00 D2 ST L100 00 GDSCZ3 6 00 803 ST L100 00 60524 1 00 04 ST L100 00 50545 B 00 D5 ST L100 00 505046 4 00 06 ST 1100 00 005247 8 50 07 ST L100 00 GOSC 8 10 00 D8 ST L100 00 05049 1 50 09 ST L100 00 050510 10 00 0010 ST L100 00 CON SALT 3 0 CON SAL2 2 000 LON SAL3 5 000 COH SAL4 6 000 COM SALS 8 000 SALG 1 000 COH SALT 6 000 COH SALB 000 SALO 8 000 SER CHRG 14 CASH TIP NOCA TIP L18 DEPOSIT L18 DEPO L18 HRA L18 eR L18 epp L18 0 L18 9999999 99 Sentinel CHK CG 999999 99 HALO BONUS POINT n So M cT AMOUNT 1 00 BONUS POINTI 4 AMOUNT2 2 00 BONUS POINT2 2 3 00 BONUS POINT3 3 AMOUNT4 4 00 BONUS POINT4 4 AMOUNTS 5 00 BONUS POINTS 5 AMOUNT 6 00 BONUS POINTG 6 AMOUNT 1 00 BONUS POINT 7 AMOUNTS 8 00 BONUS POINTB 8 AMOUNTS 9 00 BONUS POINTS 9 AMOUNTTO 10 00 BONUS POINT10 10 BONUS REDEMPTION MUM POIN 1 REDEEMED POINTS 1 REDEEMED AMOUNT 1 00 Media key PGM2 mode PGH2 MEDIA CASH LIB 00001001 999999 99 CASK L18 00001001 999999 99 CASH3 L18 00001001 999999 99 CASH L18 00001011 999999 99 CASHS L18 00001001 999999 99 CHECK L18 0000001001 999999 99 CHECKS L18 0000001001 999999 99 CREDITI L18 000000111 N 306
41. 26 000 0 24 000 Q 0 17 000 0 141 50 71 50 102 50 148 30 89 90 139 80 186 30 117 40 75 70 166 When you take a Z report Z1 is printed instead of X1 Time Transaction counter Sales total Promotion PLU EAN report X1 PROMOTION PLU P PLUO0043 P 00044 PLUOOO44 001 999 40 4 00 50 50 24 10 2 44 10 10 20 Promotion sales counter and discount total Quantity for promotion sales 167 Transaction report K1 TRANSACTION DEPT TL 1032 230 Q 3776 63 DEPT 6 000 Q 15 60 TL 7 000 Q 38 06 HASH 3 000 Q 4 51 BTTL TL 5 0000 34 25 BTTL 5 000 0 8 60 NT TLI 4 000 Q x11 92 TL2 3 000 0 9 79 TL3 2 000 Q 10 93 Plus dept total Minus dept total Hash dept total Hash minus total Bottle return dept total Bottle return minus total Non turnover 1 total In this report the same transaction data as those printed in the general report are printed Total in drawer report Ni TL ID EXCH 20 61 48 DOM CURT 39 64 EXCH2 10 30 00 DOM CUR 24 48 EXCH3 10 A DOM CUR3 22 71 EXCH4 20 39 39 DOM CURA 35 40 EXCH5 10 29 30 DOM CURS 26 13 EXCH6 20 44 77 DOM CURG 33 60 7 10 37 42 DOM CUR 326 13 EXCH8 20 63 04 DOM CURB 56 67 EXCH9 10 40 00 DOM CURS 30 02
42. 43 86 SCM TTL x2469 94 SER CHRG 314 75 HOTEL TRANS 10 18 70 CASH 171 516481 CASH2 100 133 11 CASH3 20 55 10 CASH4 10 88 20 CASH 30 70 30 CHECK 50 15381 CHECK2 20 26 60 CHECK3 20 340 50 CHECK4 20 28 90 CHECKS 10 9 90 CREDITI 20 38 00 CREDIT2 10 9 90 CREDIT3 1Q x14 60 CREDIT4 10 17 30 CREDITS 10 18 40 CREDITS 20 39 30 CHARGE 80 197 41 20 61 48 DOM CURT 39 64 CH 10 30 00 DOK CUR 24 48 XCH3 1 30 00 DOM CUR3 22 Ti EXCH4 20 39 39 DOM CURA 35 40 XCH5 10 29 30 DOK CUR 26 13 XCH6 20 44 77 DOM CURG x33 60 EXCH7 1Q 31 42 DOM CUR7 26 13 EXCHB 20 63 0 DOM CURG 56 67 EXCH 10 40 00 DOM CURS 30 02 e Deposit counter and total Received on account counter and total Received on account counter and total Received on account counter and total Paid out counter and total Starting cash memory Starting cash memory Starting cash memory total Service charge total Hotel transfer counter and total Cash counter and total Check 1 sale counter and total Credit 1 sale and tendering and total Exchange 1 counter and total 173 een TICKET A tt 18027 79 274 11 18301 90 4 10 5 60 Cash in drawer Cash check in drawer Change total for check tendering Ticket total for change due GLUR1001 GLUR1003 GLUR1006
43. 5515 41 CHECK ID 271411 CA CHK ID 5789 52 168 Exchange 1 counter Currency exchange 1 total Domestic currency for currency exchange 1 total Total in drawer Check in drawer Cash check in drawer Commission sales report COMMISSION SALES COH SALI COH AHTI COH 5412 COM AMT2 NON CON NET 1 4229 50 32 15870 14 16442 61 Commission sale 1 total Commission amount 1 Commission sale x Commission rate Commission amount total Non commission sales amount 169 Tax report 1 TAX NET1 16442 61 TAXI ST 7020 91 VAT 1 489 83 TAX2 ST 8300 33 VAT 2 241 76 TAX3 ST 7873 02 VAT 3 302 81 TAX4 ST 4817 92 AT 4 229 42 TAX5 ST 4418 92 VAT 5 86 65 TAX6 ST 5980 02 VAT 6 174 18 TTL TAX 1504 65 CC TAXI ST 118 70 CC VAT 1 8 28 CC TAK2 ST 110 30 CC VAT 2 3 21 CC TAX3 ST 107 50 CC VAT 3 4 13 CC TAX4 ST 96 00 L VAT 4 4 57 CC ST 101 00 CC VAT 5 1 98 CC TAX6 ST 100 30 CC VAT 6 B a CC TTL TAX T 7 H Chief report 1 CHIEF T TABLE 329 87 16493 65 50 0 T G 71 09 16493 65 232 0 099 58 16493 65 150 GUEST 385 0 33 230 Q 2320 8 882 0 4033 230 0 15 AVE IT 16464 56 4033 230 a Net sales total Taxable 1 subtotal VAT 1 total Tax total
44. 80 Sil Tax delete total VAT SFT 2 10 OO Credit customer VAT shift total DELE 2 40 si Credit customer tax delete total CHRG 1 3 62 Service charge total 2 5 2 q 0 61 Item counter and total 6 20 0 53 7 170 8 03 C8 1Q 0 25 X5 1 0 O 39 counter and total x6 3Q 0 39 x7 10 0 42 48 1Q 0 34 GDSC 1 2 0 3 92 I Group discount counter and total GDSC210 20 3 40 DISCOUNT 50 6 44 Discount in promotion sale CP PLU 3 Q B 30 Coupon like PLU counter and total 14 Bonus points for item BON PTS ANT 407 Bonus points for amount BONUS POINTS 421 Bonus points total BON PTS RDH 1 0 1 00 Bonus point redemption REDEHPT TL 1 q 1 E 00 7 1 Bonus point redemption total REFUND 2 0 6 50 Refund counter and total VD g Q 5335 30 REG mode item void counter and total vo I D 2 38 00 Void mode transaction counter and total HGR VO 8 1 38 00 Manager item void counter and total SBTL vD 1 15 90 Subtotal void counter and total WASTE TL 4 0 20 70 Waste mode transaction ETURN 3 4 4 20 Return counter and total HASH VD 20 3 00 Hash item void counter and total HASH RF 1 Q 1 15 ii Hash item refund counter and total HASH RT 1 Q x1 20 Hash item return counter and total NOTURNYD 1 Q x1 60 Non turnover item void counter and total NOTURNRF 1 Q 2 10 Non turnover item refund counter and
45. CASH_TOTAL PLU00042 1 PROMO 2 3 88 CASH 5 82 5 82 43 PLU EAN link entries In case that you register a PLU or EAN that has any PLU linked with the PLU or EAN the linked PLU s are automatically registered together with the leading link PLU or EAN when it is registered The print format on the receipt depends on the programming PRINT SELECT2 in OPTIONAL menu in PGM2 mode as described below Printing detailed information The description texts and amounts of the leading link PLU EAN and the linked PLUs are printed individually Example Key Operation Display PLU 00021 CASH_TOTAL PLUOOQ 1 103 00 3 00 PLUOOO40 10 50 250 PLUOOQA1 CASH 130 7 20 Printing leading link PLU EAN and total sales amount The description text of the leading link PLU EAN and the total sales amount of the leading link PLU EAN and the linked PLUs are printed Key Operation Display PLU 00021 CASH_TOTAL 1x7 20 7 20 PLUOOQ 1 CASH 7 20 7 20 If a discount entry is made for a link PLU EAN entry the discount amount is calculated based the total sales amount The discount itself is given to the leading link PLU EAN 44 H EAN learning function When you enter or scan an undefined code you are required to enter its unit price and the associated department The code associated department and unit price entered are stored in the EAN file or the dynamic EAN file and used for fut
46. EZI When the POS terminal has been programmed for the lock shift mode Key Operation Display Price level 1 PRICE SHIFT1 PLU 00001 Price level2 PRICE SHIFT2 PLU 00001 PLUOOQ01 Price level 2 PLU 00002 12 00 2 00 CASH TOTAL PLU00002 132 00 2 00 PLU00002 CASH 5 00 xex TOTAL 3 00 H Condiment entries The terminal may be programmed for prompting condiment and instructions for a menu item PLU Example When you enter a menu item PLU a message such as HOWCOOK is prompted and a list of the Condiment PLUs will appear You must specify one of the Condiment PLUs such as WELLDONE to meet a special order of the guest In an example of the condiment table shown below it is assumed that condiment table no 1 is assigned to PLU number 21 programmed text STEAK and table no 4 is assigned to table no 1 as the next table no When you enter the PLU number 21 the message HOWCOOK will appear to prompt you to specify one of RARE MED RARE and WELLDONE If the guest chooses RARE select it from the list Then the next message POTATO will appear to prompt you to specify one of P CHIPS MASHED P BAKED P If the guest chooses mashed potato select it If the guest chooses baked potato the flavor list will appear to prompt you to specify one of BUTTER and SOUR CREAM Here is an example of how to perform a condiment entry when your condim
47. For EAN it is fixed to NO CONDIMENT COMPULSORY Makes a condiment entry compulsory NON COMPULSORY Makes a condiment entry non compulsory For EAN it is fixed to NON COMPULSORY To be continued 208 Text Parameter COMPULSORY Makes PLU EAN price level shift compulsory PRICE SHIFT INHIBIT Inhibits PLU EAN price level shift ALLOWED Allows PLU EAN price level shift COMPULSORY Makes a scale entry compulsory SCALE ENABLE Enables a scale entry INHIBIT Inhibits a scale entry TARE TABLE Scale table number associated with scale entry 1 through 9 0 SORT GROUP PLU sort group number 00 through 99 01 INFORMATION Information text number max 4 digits 0001 to 9999 0000 COMMISSION No You can assign a PLU EAN to a commission group 1 through 9 If the number 0 is entered no commission group number will be assigned to a PLU EAN OUTPUT KP No 1 ID number of the network remote printer 1 1 through 9 If the number 0 is entered no remote printer will operate OUTPUT KP No 2 ID number of the network remote printer 2 1 through 9 If the number 0 is entered no remote printer will operate RECEIPT PRINT YES Prints the PLU EAN sales information on the receipt NO Prints nothing on the receipt YES Printing on the clerk report PRINTON NO No printing TAXABLE1 YES Makes the PLU
48. The following window is displayed 3 Select the customer record and touch the OK key To cancel the operation touch the CANCEL key If the customer name is not found in the list the new record can be created by touching the NEW key then the window is displayed to enter a new customer record ENTER INFORMATION 112 Key Operation PLU 00003 NAME amp ADD Enter a name In this example N is entered OK The customer list is displayed Select the customer ENTER PLU 00002 CASH_TOTAL Display m i ne eee Boi I i i f LEZ 1 1 00 1 00 00003 NAME 5 v 0001 1x1 00 1 00 PLUOOOO3 1x1 00 1 00 00002 CASH 2 00 113 H Customer bill printing This function prints the data of customer transactions finalized with the CUST_CHARGE key Enter a customer code for which you want to print the transaction data The range of data to be printed can be specified by date You can also choose to clear or keep the printed data Procedure 1 Touch the CUST_BILL key The following window is displayed CUSTOMER BILL BACK PAE 01 01 2000 L RECEIPT REPORT PRINTER CUSTOMER NOT AVAILABLE MEN Ni 2 Enter the customer code or scan the customer code by bar code scanner Enter the start date enter 0 to print the data of last date Enter the end date Select the printer type
49. UPC A w o check digit 11 6 EAN 8 8 EAN 13 13 15 18 Your register automatically judges the add on code in an EAN code entered from the total number of digits and the flag H EAN file Your POS terminal has an EAN main file and can provide a Dynamic EAN D EAN file EAN main file In general use all EAN items are managed in the EAN main file The programming data and sales information is recorded in the EAN main file Dynamic EAN file If an dynamic EAN file is allocated the items entered by EAN learning function refer to EAN learning function section are saved in this file temporarily If not generated they are directly saved in the EAN main file The data saved temporarily can be transferred to the EAN main file when necessary by executing D EAN LOAD in the PGM2 mode If you want to use the dynamic EAN file consult your authorized SHARP dealer 328 EURO Migration Function Basically your POS terminal can be automatically modified to correspond to the introduction of EURO by executing the operation EURO STATUS in X2 Z2 mode However there are several options you must set depending on your need So please carefully conduct necessary settings For details contact your authorized SHARP dealer EURO status You can select status from following 4 types A B C or D And the selectable type is decided as follows for each status Type A is the base status initial status
50. function 47 EAN price change function AAA SE 48 meal PLU EAN entries mmm HH 49 With without entries mmm Hee 50 PLU menu keys categories a EC EU ARS an or a qe dee MERE drew Ru mu Qa diea edere Quei Hd ek a eue a ofa 51 PLU level shift for direct PLUs pore PIU CP 52 Price level shift telefon Vere du fein n sin aree qu a teu x m a wt aa n ett i jM ATE x np EUR RO a a die a aia e d d m id m e 54 Condiment entries OO OO OO ODYO DOU DO OO EAT E 56 Pint entries e Aa iodine IECIT ED Mr pr DE rM 59 Happy hour a aaa n nat Bonjan a ia ete k i n alete ne RD n ale ni afe a a dunt pads Vas RE Des essa Dus sues duis mE raj das aber k a alo Ees fed day 60 Crate entries 61 Display of Subtotals E ce d EE ME n 63 Subtotal ONA Do 63 Difference subtotal Differ ST sedeo m a uta n a a a a n raa a d a m n m n du a pa a ap e A sa a 63 Finalization of Transaction EM TEE 64 Computation of VAT Value Added Tax Tax mmm 66 VAT tax Syst
51. nd steak Rare Vegetable Carrot 1x Steak Rare Carrot How cook for 3 rd steak Medium Vegetable Peas 1x Steak Medium Peas e Multiplication entry method The items of the condiment table can be entered by multiplication entry Example 3 steaks process Operation Display Receipt window Note 3 Steak 1x Steak 1x Steak 1x Steak 2 Rare Medium How cook 1x Steak Rare 1x Steak Rare 1x Steak Medium 1 st condiment is automatically processed 2 Peas Select items Vegetable Select item 1x Steak Rare 1x Steak Rare 1x Steak Medium After 2 nd condiment it is necessary to select items 1x Steak Rare Peas 1x Steak Rare 1x Steak Medium Peas Carrot Vegetable 1x Steak Rare Peas 1x Steak Rare Carrot 1x Steak Medium Peas Last item Not necessary to select items 57 58 Key Operation PLU 00021 RARE MASHED P CASH_TOTAL Display STEAK 1x0 00 JRARE 1x0 60 JMASHED P CASH 0 00 0 60 2 60 2 60 Pint entries Using this function you can sell an item with the desired quantity such as a half and a double To perform this function touch the HALF_PINT key and enter an item assigned a PLU EAN code for which you have programmed a pint price and a pint quantity The price for the pint quantity will appear on the receipt For details
52. or credit tender is compulsory until total check or credit tender exceeds or equals to non cash tip amount Then cash tender operation is allowed Procedure e Cash tip entry Tip amount CASH TIP e Non cash tip entry Tip amount NONCASH TIP Key Operation Display 1007 GLU RUTTOUZ 200 CASH_TIP PLUOOOOL 200 CASH TOTAL 1500 CREDIT 1 CASH TIP CASH CREDITI CHANGE 99 H Tip paid entries This operation is used when tips that guests have paid by using credit card are paid to respective clerks in cash To perform the tip paid entry touch the TIP_PAID key in the MGR mode Example Key Operation Display in the MGR mode gt TIP_PAID TIP PAID 6 00 XKKTOTAL 6 00 100 Currency exchange Your POS terminal allows payment entries in foreign currency after sales entry or during amount tendered entry Touching the EXCH1 through EXCH9 keys creates a subtotal in foreign currency Cash alone can be handled after currency conversion Procedure gt EXCH1 thru EXCH9 Amount tendered max 8 digits through CASH5 For direct finalization CHECK through CHECK5 CREDIT1 through CREDIT9 CLEAR For re entry of currency conversion next registration or payment in domestic currency e The terminal also allows you to enter currency conversion from the exchange menu touch the exchange menu key and select exchange items the
53. with the CORR key 192 For cash CASH IS e Select the money type by touching item or using the ENTER key e Enter quantities of money and touch the ENTER key e To terminate the entry touch the OK ADD key e To void an incorrect entry select the money type and enter correct quantities and touch the CORR key CORR 1 For check CHECK IS e Enter quantities of check and touch the ENTER key OK ADD1 CORR 1 e Enter amount of check and touch the ENTER key e To void an incorrect entry enter quantities and amount and touch the CORR key For the currency conversion type is the same as the check type 193 Programming This chapter explains how to program various items Before you start programming select the PGM1 or PGM2 mode from the mode selection window depending on the item you are going to program Programming Menu Processing The programming menu processing is shown below tables H PGM1 mode READING DEPARTMENT PLU EAN RANGE PICK UP NEW PICKING LAST PICKING DYNAMIC EAN RANGE PICK UP NEW PICKING LAST PICKING FUNCTIONS CLERK CASHIER SETTING ARTICLE DEPARTMENT PLU EAN DYNAMIC EAN PLU EAN STOCK OVER WRITE ADD SUBTRACT FUNCTIONS COMMISSION SERVICE CHARGE FOREIGN CURRENCY PERSONNEL CLERK CASHIER LICENCE 194 H PGM2
54. 00 CHARGE 0 00 0 00 Print 0800000000075HNAME 2 ADDR 2 e When the customer settles his her charge account or partial payment is done Key Operation CUSTOMER 0800000000075 ENTER 3000 RA CASH_TOTAL 1x 1 00 1 00 PLUOOQ03 CHARGE x1 00 0 00 CHARGE 1 00 1 00 Print 0800000000075 NANE 2 ADDR 2 HARA x30 00 CASH 30 00 PBAL 1 00 CHARGE 30 00 28 00 111 Name and address printing on receipt bill To use this function please consult your SHARP authorized dealer This function allows you to print on the receipt or bill a name and address saved in the name and address file The data of the name and address file can be created on your computer and transferred to the POS terminal via online communications or optional SD card This function is available in the following situations e Touch the NAME amp ADD key during a transaction e Touch the NAME amp ADD key in the name input box for a new customer entry e After touching a media key programmed to make name and address entries compulsory Procedure 1 Touch the NAME amp ADD key or after touching a media key programmed to make name and address entries compulsory The following window is displayed for NAME entry EN EN EN EN EN EA ENEN ENEN 11 2 Enter a name and touch the OK key
55. 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the ARTICLE button to display the menu and touch the HAPPY HOUR button to display the each happy hour 3 Touch the happy hour 1 through 9 to program the each happy hour 4 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTERI key Repeat this step 4 satisfactorily 5 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter START TIME Start time hour minute 0000 to 2359 END TIME End time hour minute 0000 to 2359 SHIFT LEVEL Shift level 1 to 9 MONDAY ENABLE Enables the happy hour function DISABLE Disables the happy hour function ENABLE Enables the happy hour function TUESDAY A DISABLE Disables the happy hour function WEDNESDAY ENABLE Enables the happy hour function DISABLE Disables the happy hour function ENABLE Enables the happy hour function THURSDAY i DISABLE Disables the happy hour function ENABLE Enables the happy hour function FRIDAY DISABLE Disables the happy hour function ENABLE Enables the happy hour function SATURDAY DISABLE Disables the happy hour function ENABLE Enables the happy hour function SUNDAY DISABLE Disables the happy hour function 210 PLU menu key ARTICLE gt PLU MENU KEY PGM2 Menu number max 2 digits 1 to 50 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SET
56. 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the FUNCTIONS button to display the menu and touch the GROUP DISCOUNT button to display the group discount key list 3 Select the group discount key to program each function key 4 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 4 satisfactorily 5 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter RATE Percent rate 0 00 to 100 00 TEXT DISC Description for the group discount key Up to 12 characters be entered TEXT DISC ST Description for group discount subtotal Up to 12 characters be entered Programming of the or sign assigns the premium or SIGN discount function to each group discount key Minus amount discount Plus amount premium HALO HALO HALO High Amount Lockout for the group discount key 0 00 to 100 00 Commission FUNCTIONS gt COMMISSION PGM2 or PGM1 1 Select the PGM1 or PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the FUNCTIONS button to display the menu and touch the COMMISSION button to display the commission list 3 Select the commission to program each function 4 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 4 satisfactorily 5 To terminat
57. 13 10 0007 0001 03 04 2008 20 60 X1 Z1 stacked report You can print multiple X1 Z1 reports in sequence under a single transaction In this case you need to program in advance which X1 Z1 reports should be printed Refer to Stacked report under Section POS Setting Data in Chapter 10 Programming of INSTRUCTION MANUAL 180 Grand total balance of the previous day Order total Paid total Old balance today s balance When you take a Z report Z1 is printed instead of X1 Bill number Date Clerk code Amount Non accessed EAN report eX 1 NON ACCESSED EAN EAN 40001010223344 ITEMI2 0 0000 0 00 40001112225554 ITEMS 0 0000 4001212343458 DEMO 0000 0 X 8000 EAN code Item label 1 When you select DELETE Z1 is printed instead of X1 2 When there is any sales data of the EAN for PLU EAN report the data is printed here When you delete the EAN in Z1 mode under this situation the EAN data for PLU EAN report is also deleted 181 Periodic Report Samples Your POS terminal allows you to take consolidation X and Z reports of a chosen period the period is usually one week or month H General information The periodic reading or resetting reports are the same in format as those in the X1 Z1 report for daily sales information except mode indication X2 or Z2 e Sample X report
58. 16 Prior to Making Entries Preparations for Entries Ensure that all printers in your system have adequate paper rolls prior to beginning entries For more information please refer to the applicable printers manual Error Warning In the following examples your POS terminal will go into an error state accompanied with a warning beep and the error message on the display Clear the error state by touching the CLEAR key and then take the proper action to remedy the problem When you make an error in key operation Clear the error and try the entry again When you make an entry beyond a programmed amount entry limit Check to see if the entered amount is correct If it is correct contact your manager When an including tax subtotal exceeds eight digits Clear the error message by touching the CLEAR key and then touch a media key to finalize the transaction 17 Entering a Secret Code When a secret code has been set for the assigned clerk you must enter the secret code and touch the ENTER key ENTER SECRET CODE 18 Entries Function Key Description H Screen transitions This POS terminal provides the several types of basic screens for various functions or modes For example REG mode screen HOME screen Mode screen Payment key screen etc If you want to change the layout consult your authorized SHARP dealer Screen transitions example Screen n HO
59. 30 8 00 VOID 10 41 20 MGR VD 30 41 20 SBTL VD 10 71 6 WASTE TL 4Q 13 30 RETURN 10 x2 50 NO SALE 54 G C CNT 10 GUEST 46 0 HERA 4Q 114 30 10 29 80 29 20 1 70 x9 20 4 20 0 10 30 00 PO 10 20 00 SCH 4913 20 SCH 94 40 SCH TTL 4818 80 CASH 110 273 18 CASH 20 9400 CASH3 10 0 03 CASH4 30 961 30 CASHS 1Q 1 60 CHECK 30 69 80 CHECK 10 18 25 CHECK3 14 10 00 CHECK4 10 6 50 CHECKS 14 20 40 CREDITI 20 100 00 CREDIT2 30 959 30 IEEE ea 175 CREDITS 20 2680 CREDITS 20 49 50 EXCH 10 60 00 DOK CURT 38 70 EXCH2 10 40 00 DOM CUR 32 64 XCH3 1 50 00 CUR3 37 84 EXCH4 10 50 00 DOH CURA 44 94 5 10 80 00 DOM CURS 71 34 KCH6 10 40 00 DON CURG 30 02 EXCH 10 40 00 DOM CUR 27 92 KCHB 10 60 00 DON CURB 53 04 EXCHO 10 35 00 DOM CURS 26 26 bbl YA 5206 70 CHECK ID 154 95 CA CHK ID 5361 65 CHK CG 70 TICKET 6 40 176 Hourly report When you take a Z report Z1 is printed instead of X1 r Time X1x HOURLY 0 00 60 81 80 VE x13 63 0 30 7Q 205 11 NE 29 30 SUBTOTAL 130 286 91 1 00 90 9383 63 342 853 1 30 20 580 85 NE 290 43 SUBTOTAL 10 964 48 Qu ME NEED O CE LLL 19 00 10 315 71 5 19 73 19 30 200 399 70 NE x19 99 SUBTOTAL 360 715 41 Labor cost report
60. 305 230 Q 305 77 WASTE 2 000 0 4 20 PLUOOOO2 5 0000 11 00 WASTE 2 000 Q 4 40 PLUOOOO2 2 000 0 6 40 WASTE 1 000 Q 3 20 P0004 PLUOQO44 17 0000 24 28 WASTE 1 000 0 1 50 0004 6 0000 12 00 WASTE 2 000 0 4 00 PLUOOD44 5 0000 5 00 WASTE 1 0000 3 00 ATOTAL 623 230 0 1107 67 11 000 Q 29 30 L2 g 0000 64 60 WASTE At Q 17 80 L3 000 0970 WASTE 000 Q 18 50 COMBO MEAL PLUOOQ22 10 0000 39 30 pa van oe ee ee eee PLUOOO23 5 0000 21 50 WASTE 1 000 Q 4 30 exTOTAL 21 0000 87 60 WASTE 8 000 Q 36 80 L2 6 0000 24 60 WASTE 3 000 0 12 10 9 0000 37 10 WASTE 3 000 9 12 10 40078175247324 ITEMO2 22 0000 59 40 Price range 165 TOTAL L1 000 Q 559 40 WASTE 4 000 Q 10 80 24 000 72 00 WASTE 6 000 0 18 00 L3 32 000 Q 56 00 WASTE 40000 12 00 COMBO HEAL 400321321 7654 ITENO 29 0000 113 10 WASTE 4 000 Q 15 60 TOTAL 29 000 Q 113 10 WASTE 4 000 Q 15 60 L2 17 000 Q 66 30 WASTE 4 000 15 60 Li 22 0000 5 80 HASTE 4 000Q 15 60 PLU EAN hourly group report DAE PLU HOURLY GROUP 18 00 HOUR GRI HOUR GR2 HOUR GR3 19 000 Q 59 47 000 Q 171 00 60 50 95 70 168 40 x52 60 133 60 218 10 92 70 81 50 461 50 99 80 x137 30 407 30 397 50 313 60 HOUR GRO 19 000 Q
61. AMT5 Commission amount 5 239 No Default text Classification Note 122 COM AMT6 Commission amount 6 max 12 characters 123 COM AMT7 Commission amount 7 124 COM AMT8 Commission amount 8 125 COM AMT9 Commission amount 9 126 COM TTL Commission amount total 127 BILL BAL Bill balance 128 FREE GLU Free GLU 129 OLD BAL Old balance 130 SCMTTL Starting cash memory total 131 T TABLE Turnover per table 132 T GUEST Turnover per guest 133 T BILL Turnover per bill 134 I GUEST Item per guest 135 1 BILL Item per bill 136 AVE ITEM Average price per item 137 TTL COST Total labor cost 138 LOC Location no 139 L COST Location cost 140 TTL HOUR Total hour 141 OVR TIME Over time 142 OVR COST Over cost 143 TIME IN Time in 144 TIME OUT Time out 145 BREAK IN Break in 146 BREAK OUT Break out 147 BREAK TL Break total 148 LABOR Labor percent 149 TTL TAX Total tax 150 NET Net without tax 151 TOWNNAME Town name 1 152 TOWNNAME Town name 2 153 TRANSFER Cash transfer 154 GLU GLU code 155 ROOM Room GLU text 156 HF PINT SAL Half pint sale 157 ALL FOODS amp C Bill general text left half 158 DRINKS C Bill general text right half 159 TARE WT Tare weight 160 RCP SW Receipt switch 161 BI
62. Amount for getting bonus point 1 Bonus point 1 Minimum bonus point Redeemed bonus point Redeemed amount Report type Function text HALO Programming CREDIT6 CREDIT CREDITS CREDITS CHARGE HOTEL TRANS CA CHK CA CHK2 CA CHK3 CA CHK4 CA CHKS FOREIGN CURRENCY m US 500 EURO X HOD Ecc n iii L18 000000101 999999 99 L18 000000101 999999 99 L18 000000101 999999 99 L18 000000101 999999 99 L18 bi 999999 99 999999 999999 99 999999 99 550220 2 e lt t e gt gt EV CI ccc O OG ES O O NI A en 20 00 Rate 307 Training text clerk PGM2 mode PGN2 TRAINING TEXT CLK TRAINING CODE TRAINING TEXT Report type 0004 0000 TRAINING Training clerk or cashier code Training mode title text Clerk PGM1 or PGM2 mode Linked GLU code Key number 308 PGN2 CLERK Report type CLKFOOO l a 99 000000000000 Clerk code Clerk name Linked room GLU code VIP sale programming VIP 1 2 3 000 000 00 001 00000018100 0101111 0002 EDWARD 9999 1 9999 000 000000000000000 00 002 00000018100 D1 0000 CLKR DOO3S m ERIC T Drawer number Secret code Operation mode programming PGM2 PGM1 PRICE X1 Z1 X2Z2 AUTO KEY FLASH SD CARD AUTO MENL 1 to 6 1 9999 000 000000000000000 00 003 00000018100 01 00
63. CLERK CODE Clerk code CLERK NAME Clerk name ORDER TL Order total COM SAL1 Commission sales 1 COM AMT1 Commission amount 1 COM SAL2 Commission sales 2 COM AMT2 Commission amount 2 COM SAL3 Commission sales 3 COM AMT3 Commission amount 3 COM SALA Commission sales 4 COM AMTA Commission amount 4 COM SAL5 Commission sales 5 COM AMT5 Commission amount 5 COM SAL6 Commission sales 6 COM AMT6 Commission amount 6 COM SAL7 Commission sales 7 COM AMT7 Commission amount 7 COM SAL8 Commission sales 8 COM AMT8 Commission amount 8 COM SAL9 Commission sales 9 COM AMT9 Commission amount 9 COM TTL Commission amount total NON COM Non commission PAID TL Paid total AVE Average paid total guest O P Difference order total paid total NT TL1 Non turnover 1 total NT TL2 Non turnover 2 total NT TL3 Non turnover 3 total VIP SALES1 VIP1 sale VIP SALES2 VIP2 sale VIP SALES3 VIP3 sale TRANS OUT Transfer out TRANS IN Transfer in BILL BAL Transfer out transfer in 266 Text Classification Parameter REFUND Refund SKIP NOT SKIP VD Item void VOID Void mode transaction MGR VD MGR void ST VD Subtotal void WASTE WASTE mode transaction RETURN Return see PBAL PBAL ae NBAL NBAL SKIP NOT SKIP NOSALE No sale SKIP NOT SKIP G C CNT Guest check counter GUEST Guest counter DEPOSIT Deposit DEPO
64. EAN code The operation before touching the REFUND key is the same as the one of normal operation For example if a refund item is the one entered into a department enter the amount of the refund then touch the REFUND key and the corresponding department key in this order if an item entered into a PLU is returned enter the corresponding PLU code then touch the REFUND and PLU_EAN keys and if a refund item is the one entered into an EAN touch the REFUND key and scan the EAN code eu Key Operation Display PLU 00002 REFUND PLU 00003 7 X QTY 6 REFUND PLU_EAN 1 00 R 7 00 285 AMOUNT 2 REFUND DEPT PLUOOQ06 CASH TOTAL h 85 R 2 85 DPT O2 CHANGE 9 85 H Return entries For a return entry touch the RETURN key just before you touch a department key DEPT key direct PLU key or PLU_EAN key or just before you scan an EAN code The operation before touching the RETURN key is the same as the one of normal operation For example if a return item is the one entered into a department enter the amount of the return then touch the RETURN key and the corresponding department key in this order if an item entered into a PLU is returned enter the corresponding PLU code then touch the RETURN and PLU_EAN keys and if a return item is the one entered into an EAN touch the RETURN key and scan the EAN code eu Key Operation Display PLU 00002 RETURN PLU 00003 PLU
65. ENTER key Repeat this step 4 satisfactorily 5 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter TEXT Description for the check cashing Up to 12 characters can be entered HALO max 8 digits 0 to 99999999 232 Customer charge key MEDIA gt CUSTOMER CHARGE PGM2 1 2 3 4 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming Touch the MEDIA button to display the menu Touch the CUSTOMER CHARGE button to program details Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 4 satisfactorily 5 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key 2 oo Text Parameter TEXT Description for the customer charge key Up to 12 characters can be entered A Significant digit for HALO 1 through 9 HALO B Number of zeros to follow the significant digit for HALO 0 through 8 AB is the same as A x 108 COMPULSORY Makes bill printing compulsory BILL PRINT NON COMPULSORY Makes bill printing non compulsory This item decides whether or not your POS terminal should print a message at the foot of a receipt when a specified customer charge key is used YES Enables footer printing on the receipt NO Disables footer printing on the receipt FOOTER PRINT You can make the non add code entry compulsory when a customer charge entry is a
66. NON ACCESSED CUST 3 To take a reading report select READING To delete non accessed customers select DELETE The selection window ALL DELETE IND DELETE is displayed To delete all the non accessed customers select ALL DELETE To delete the non accessed customers individually select ND DELETE 4 To terminate the operation touch the EXIT button It is recommended to take a report first before executing deleting operation e Customer deletion 1 Select the X2 Z2 mode 2 Select CUSTOMER DELETE 3 Specify the range start end customer codes you want to delete 191 Compulsory Cash Check Declaration CCD If your POS terminal has been programmed for compulsory cash check declaration you must declare the cash check value in the drawer in advance according to the type of declaration specified for when you take clerk Z reports Use the following procedure for this declaration Types of compulsory cash check declaration In case CCD by clerk cashier in Clerk only system is applied to your machine e Compulsive when individual clerk resetting is taken In case CCD by clerk cashier in Clerk Cashier system is applied to your machine e Compulsive when individual cashier resetting is taken In case CCD for all clerks cashiers in Clerk only system is applied to your machine e Compulsive when all clerk resetting is taken In case CCD for all clerks cashiers in Clerk Cas
67. Open GLU code n ROOH 1 ROONRZ gt Open room GLU code From here the printing is selectable by programming PRINT ON CLK in department and PLU EAN programming in ARTICLE menu When YES is selected the printing of department report and or PLU EAN report will be done Individual clerk report In case of clerk cashier system CLKFOOO 1 ORDER TL 1 IND CLERK CLERKOOO1 24685 42 ed 439 89 16391 24 When you take Z report Z1 is printed instead of X1 From here the printing is selectable by programming PRINT ON CLK in department and PLU EAN programming in ARTICLE menu When YES is selected the printing of department report and or PLU EAN report will be done 174 All cashier report In case of clerk cashier system When you take a Z report Z1 is printed instead of X1 X14 ALL CASHIER CSROOO 1 LASHIEROOO1 The subsequent items printed out in the same format as in the individual cashier report from the cashier 1 In the all cashier report the total sales of all cashiers are also printed Individual cashier report In case of clerk cashier system IX 1 When you take a Z report Z1 is printed instead of X1 IND CASHIER CSRROOO 1 LASHIEROO01 PAID TL 1103 75 AVE 23 99 SALE 7 40 VIP2 SALE 18 10 VIP3 SALE 21 50 REFUND 1Q 5 30 VD
68. PLU condiment table ARTICLE gt gt CONDIMENT TABLE PGM2 Table number max 2 digits 1 to 99 Condiment PLU max 30 condiment PLUs Example When you enter a menu item PLU a message such as HOWCOOK is prompted and a list of the Condiment PLUS will appear You must specify one of the Condiment PLUs such as WELLDONE to meet a special order of the guest In an example of the condiment table shown below it is assumed that condiment table no 1 is assigned to PLU number 21 programmed text STEAK and table no 4 is assigned to table no 1 as the next table no When you enter the PLU number 21 the message HOWCOOK will appear to prompt you to specify one of RARE MED RARE WELLDONE If the guest chooses RARE select it from the list Then the next message POTATO will appear to prompt you to specify one of P CHIPS MASHED P BAKED P If the guest chooses mashed potato select it If the guest chooses baked potato the flavor list will appear to prompt you to specify one of BUTTER and SOUR CREAM Here is an example of how to perform a condiment entry when your condiment table is as shown below Example PLU PLU Name Price Condiment Table PLUOOO21 STEAK 20 00 1 PLU00038 BAKED P 0 50 5 Condiment table Condiment Linking Condiment Condiment PLU Table Table PLU Na
69. SHARP product The standard POS terminal comes with a combination of the contactless clerk key and clerk code entry systems by default If you want to change the clerk identification system contact your authorized SHARP dealer Contactless clerk keys optional Put one of the contactless clerk keys to the clerk switch Clerk code entry 1 through 9999 Enter the clerk code by using the following procedure XXXX Clerk code gt CLK Sign On Clerk entry keys CLK n Sign On These keys identify clerks Touch any one of these keys WMF clerk keys Put one of the WMF clerk keys in the WMF clerk switch 13 Before Operating the POS Terminal This chapter describes those steps required prior to using the POS terminal for the first time Display Adjustment You can adjust the brightness of the display by using the brightness control to adjust the brightness rotate the dial to the right or left The display may be positioned for the best viewing angle The allowable tilt angle of the display is within 53 degrees as shown in the illustration at the right CAUTION Do not pull the display beyond the maximum tilt angle nor apply excessive pressure to the display When adjusting the display hold the body of the terminal when pulling the display of the terminal to minimize terminal movement The LCD module built in this POS terminal is manufactured with highly precise technology However bright pi
70. SIF entries e If an entry to a department PLU or EAN set for SIF follows the ones to departments PLUs or EANS not set for SIF the transaction is finalized immediately as a cash sale e Like the SICS function this function is available for single item cash settlement Key Operation Display 750 Department 6 350 1x7 90 7 0 For finishing the transaction gt Department 8 06 183 50 3 90 DPT O8 CASH 11 00 11 00 Non turnover sales This function is used to perform transaction other than ordinary sales turnover as is the case when cigarettes or bouquets are ordered in a restaurant and the like In this case a clerk once pays the bill and demands together with other payment Itis performed by entering a department belonging to the non turnover group or PLU belonging to the department Ifyou need this function contact your authorized SHARP dealer 41 Special Entries for PLU EAN H Promotion function You have a choice of either global or individual type for promotion entry You also need to select a promotion type from the following Amount discount discounts the programmed amount Percent discount discounts the amount at the programmed percent rate Give free item offers the programmed objected item for free Cheaper item free offers the cheaper ones of the objected items for free Selling price changes the total amount of the registered objected items to the programmed selling price
71. XT TL2 3 0000 9 79 NT TL3 2 0000 10 93 154 gt dept counter and total gt dept counter and total gt hash dept counter and total gt hash dept counter and total gt bottle return dept counter and total gt bottle return dept counter and total gt Non turnover 1 counter and total H PLU EAN sales report by specified range When you take a Z report Z1 is printed instead of X1 PLU code aK 14 PLU 00001 9999999999999 PLU P 00001 PLUOOQ01 139 000 Q 1164 84 ASTE 2 0000 17 00 PLUOOO0 8 0000 72 00 ASTE 000 18 00 PLUOOOO1 8 0000 76 00 ASTE 1 000 Q 9 50 P 00002 PLUOQO02 305 230 Q 305 77 ASTE 2 000 0 4 20 PLUOOOO2 5 0000 11 00 STE 2 000 0 4 40 PLUOOOD2 2 000 0 6 40 WASTE 1 000 0 3 20 eee a eee eee eee P 00044 PLUDOO44 17 000 Q 4 28 WASTE 1 000 Q 1 50 PLUOOO44 6 0000 12 00 WASTE 2 000 0 4 00 PLUOO044 5 0000 15 00 WASTE 1 000 0 3 00 ATOTAL LI 1050 230 Q 3876 03 WASTE 15 000 0 65 90 L 25 000 Q grit 00 WASTE 9 000 0 9 40 L3 22 000 0 118 40 WASTE 5 000 Q 21 70 COMBO MEAL P 00022 PLUOOOZ2 10 0000 39 30 WASTE 4 000 0 15 60 PLUOOOZZ 3 0000 11 70 ASTE 2 000 0 1 80 PLUOOO22 4 0000 1560 ASTE 2 000 7 80 00023 PLU00023 11 0000 48 3
72. a a a m a a im a ti 323 SD card formatting eene 323 Folder code programming meme 323 Folder creating mmn on seten anan enan 324 Data saving co cdinstphascesinsicebscnsnaiearietesncasessdassccivesednseedibcucebsanccn aesneneneecer caus a kase De es LA mo 324 Data loading n a im n W a a ve n a n a m n m e n a m a m n n e a np a n A n n an a n aa nam Ba a m ka mi e a ka ERE 325 12 European Article Number EAN or Universal Product Code 326 EAN or UPC code m eene ennemi 326 Add on code ENDOU YE DO OO OO OO KON DO DE DON OU OO OU OO EN NS DOE ON EE 328 EAN file aie m m a a e e e a A an n e a W a a A a a e a a n n a a n a pi a ey 328 13 EURO Migration Function HH Henne hne 329 14 Operator Maintenance HH HH nennen 331 Case of Power Failure A EN ON nebo ees Mowe tase ut hake 331 Before Calling for Service 331 15 lt lt ettet 332 List of Options DA bale OO OO DO LD OO DO OO OU OO AOU 332 16 Specifications TEET NT T
73. customer VAT TAX 5 193 CC VAT 6 Credit customer VAT TAX 6 194 CC TTL TAX Credit customer total tax 195 CC VAT SFT Credit customer VAT shift 196 CC TAX DELE Credit customer VAT TAX delete 197 TRANSACTION transaction number 198 LICENSE END License expire message 199 C BILL Cumulated bill 241 H Department group text TEXT gt DEPT GROUP PGM2 You can program a maximum of 12 characters for each department group 1 to 9 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the TEXT button to display the menu and touch the DEPT GROUP button to display the group list 3 Touch or select the group and touch the ENTER key to program characters 4 Enter characters and touch the OK key 5 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter TEXT max 12 characters G ROUP1 through G ROUP9 PLU group text TEXT gt PLU GROUP PGM2 You can program a maximum of 12 characters for each PLU group 0 to 99 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the TEXT button to display the menu and touch the PLU GROUP button to display the group list 3 Touch or select the group and touch the ENTER key to program characters 4 Enter characters and touch the OK key 5 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter TEXT max 12 chara
74. interrupt the first clerk s entry So the second clerk can do his or her entry in this mode Interrupt handling is possible only in the overlapped clerk entry For actual use of this function contact your authorized SHARP dealer e The overlapped clerk entry is available only in the clerk entry system e The overlapped clerk entry is not effective while the tendering sale is going on e f any clerk is still making an entry or has not finalized the transaction yet the POS terminal does not run in any mode other than REG MGR and no X Z reports can be printed The message CLERK REMAINED and the related clerk are displayed Clerk 1 Entry started Clerk 2 Clerk change 1 to 2 interrupt initiated Clerk 2 Transaction finished Clerk 1 Clerk change 2 to 1 entry restarted Key Operation Clerk 1 is assigned PLU 00001 Clerk key 1 is inserted PLU 00002 PLU 00002 1 Clerk 2 is assigned PLU 00003 Clerk key 2 is inserted PLU 00005 CASH_TOTAL Clerk 1 is assigned PLU 00006 Clerk key 1 is inserted PLU 00002 CASH_TOTAL 126 Display 0001 1x1 00 1 00 PLUOOOO1 1x1 00 1 00 00002 1 1 00 1 00 00002 3 00 100002 1 00 0002 1x1 00 1 00 PLU00003 1x1 00 1 00 PLU00009 CASH 2 00 2 00 001 00002 1x1 00 1 00 PLUDOOO6 1x1 00 1 00 PLUOOOO2 CASH 5 00 3 00 Corrections Correction of Entries If you make an incorr
75. key Text Parameter MASK NO Mask number max 2 digits 6 to 25 287 Backup data send programming BACKUP SEND PGM2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the BACKUP SEND button to program details 3 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 3 satisfactorily 4 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter Select one of the following options data sources SEND DATA ALL RAM SSP Select one of the following options data transmission speeds PROGRAMMED Sends data at a programmed speed 115200bps Sends data at 115200 bps 57600bps Sends data at 57600 bps SPEED 38400bps Sends data at 38400 bps 19200bps Sends data at 19200 bps 9600bps Sends data at 9600 bps 4800bps Sends data at 4800 bps 2400bps Sends data at 2400 bps Backup data receive programming BACKUP RECEIVE PGM2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the BACKUP RECEIVE button to program details 3 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 3 satisfactorily 4 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter Select one of the following options data transmission speeds PROGRAMMED Send
76. number 0 is entered license warning function is prohibited Scale data display timer max 2 digits 0 to 99 seconds 1 SCALE DISPLAY If the number 0 is entered scale display timer function is prohibited Information area color INFO AREA COLOR Select a key color from the colors list 232 Colors Fore color Back color BLACK SILVER 251 License programming LICENSE PGM1 1 Select the PGM1 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the LICENSE button to program details 3 Enter the activation code for license and touch the ENTER key Text Parameter LICENSE Activation code for license max 16 digits 0 4 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Date time programming DATE TIME PGM2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the DATE TIME button to program details 3 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 3 satisfactorily 4 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter DATE Enter the day 2 digits month 2 digits and year 2 digits in this sequence Set the time max 4 digits on the 24 hour system For example when the time is set to 2 30 AM enter 0230 and when it is set to 2 30 PM enter 1430 The time will be printed TIME and dis
77. of 0 disables the use of real cashier keys VIP1 SALE DISABLE Disables VIP sale ENABLE Enables VIP sale VIP2 SALE DISABLE Disables VIP sale ENABLE Enables VIP sale VIP3 SALE DISABLE Disables VIP sale ENABLE Enables VIP sale DISABLE Disables guest check copy G C COPY ENABLE Enables guest check copy VAT SHIET STATE Enables VAT shift entry NOT Disables VAT shift entry DRAWER2 DRAWER No DRAWER1 NONE PGM2 MODE DISABLE Disables operation in the PGM2 mode ENABLE Enables operation in the PGM2 mode PGM1 MODE DISABLE Disables operation in the PGM1 mode ENABLE Enables operation in the PGM1 mode PRICE MODE DISABLE Disables operation in the PRICE mode ENABLE Enables operation in the PRICE mode DISABLE Disables operation in the X1 mode X1 MODE ENABLE Enables operation in the X1 mode DISABLE Disables operation in the Z1 mode Z1 MODE ras ENABLE Enables operation in the Z1 mode X2Z2 MODE DISABLE Disables operation in the X2Z2 mode ENABLE Enables operation in the X2Z2 mode DISABLE Disables operation in the FLASH mode FLASH MODE ENABLE Enables operation in the FLASH mode AUTO KEY MODE DISABLE Disables operation in the AUTO KEY mode ENABLE Enables operation in the AUTO KEY mode SD CARD MODE DISABLE Disables operation in the SD CARD mode ENABLE Enables operation in the SD CARD mode Z1 IN OPX Z DISABLE Disables resetting operation in OPXZ mode ENABLE Enables res
78. of promotion tables the global type and individual type The global type requires you to program a trip level for a set of objected items while the individual type requires you to program a trip level for each objected item Table number max 3 digits 1 to 999 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the ARTICLE button to display the menu and touch the PROMOTION TABLE button to display the table list 3 Touch or enter the promotion table number and touch the ENTER key to program the table 4 Touch the BASIC PRESET OBJECTED ITEM or LEVEL1 through LEVEL5 button to program details 5 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 5 satisfactorily 6 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key e Basic preset ARTICLE gt PROMOTION TABLE gt BASIC PRESET PGM2 Text Parameter TEXT Description for each promotion table max 12 characters GLOBAL global t TYPE ye INDIVIDUAL individual type START TIME Start time hhmm 0000 to 2359 END TIME End time hhmm 0000 to 2359 MONDAY ENABLE DISABLE TUESDAY NE DISABLE WEDNESDAY En DISABLE THURSDAY 222 DISABLE FRIDAY ENABLE DISABLE SATURDAY FNABLE DISABLE SUNDAY ENABLE DISABLE YES PROMOTION REPORT NO 215 e Objected item ARTICLE gt PROMOTION TABLE OBJE
79. receipt is printed on the receipt which is issued in the training mode The journal report completely stops in the training mode The consecutive number is not updated The preceding number is repeated in printing The memory in clerk cashier is updated in the training mode Other memories are not updated The GLU codes which are opened in the training mode are also printed on the GLU report In this case those GLU codes are distinguished from others by the character of T The data of training GLU codes are not added to the total The reading and resetting of training clerks cashiers is printed on the clerk cashier reports However the sales total of training clerks cashiers is not included in the clerk cashier total on the full clerk cashier report Key Operation Print Selecting the clerk set in training PLU 00005 12345680288 10 01 2008 15 58 PEU 000054 0004 CLERKOOO4 CASH_TOTAL TRAINING 00 1 00 1 1 PLUOOOOS 1x 1 00 31 00 PLUOOOOB CASH 2 00 124 Supervisor Clerk This function is used to substitute a supervisor clerk for an ordinary clerk The supervisor clerk can make entry as an ordinary clerk by assigning the ordinary clerk code You can use the supervisor clerk function only for substituting for an ordinary clerk This function is available only in the real clerk key system To use this function insert a real clerk key assigned supervisor clerk enter the ordinary clerk code and touch
80. separating functions bill separating by item amount and person e Bill separating by item Procedure lt Opening GLU for the original GLU code gt OPENED GLU gt Select the GLU code W A gt ENTER r Touch the GLU code gt Enter the GLU code ENTER gt Enter the GLU code GLU m To enter total q ty B S ITEM 4 GLU code for receiving GLU Item selection Q ty ENTER gt NBAL B S ITEM B S RETURN e Bill separating by amount Procedure gt B S AMOUNT T Amount gt ENTER Payment operation gt NBAL B S RETURN lt e Bill separating by person Procedure lt Opening GLU for the original GLU code gt Cee tee ne Se eee eee Se eee mem a eS J CANCEL gt All payment operation B S PERSON Guest ENTER 4 Payment selection Individual payment operation gt B S _RETURN 4 80 Bill separating by item Key Operation Touch the item to be separated Display 1001 GLU ROOT BS Bill Separation B S _ITEM 12 00 2 00 PLUDOOOS 1x1 50 1 50 PLU00001 192 50 2 50 PLUDOOOS 1x6 20 6 20 PLU00006 B S BS ORG 10
81. sharp or pointed objects and avoid using your fingernails to touch the display H Cursor control by touching option s or item s in the window You can select option s or item s by touching corresponding line s in the window as follows e Example registration screen To select item s or option s Touch the desired line s If you touch me qm the selected item again it will be PLUOOOOL deselected 2 90 3100005 EN To enter the item function key f Touch the desired item or function ihr L To scroll up Touch the A key The selected item will remain unchanged To change the screen Touch the gt key To change the screen Touch the key To scroll down Touch the W key The selected item will remain unchanged 24 Clerk Assignment Sign on Sign off H Clerk assignment Prior to any item entries a clerk must enter his her clerk codes into the POS terminal On your POS terminal You can use any of the following procedures to assign your clerk code e Contact less clerk key This type allows clerks to be assigned by setting corresponding contact less clerk keys The contact less clerk key is optional e Clerk code entry system If you select this type clerks can be assigned by entering his or her clerk code with the CLK key in advance e Clerk entry key system If you select
82. sign assigns the premium or discount function to each discount key Minus amount discount Plus amount premium SIGN A Significant digit for HALO 1 through 9 HALO B Number of zeros to follow the significant digit for HALO 0 through 8 AB is the same as A x 10 RA Received on account ENTRY TYPE ITEM Item SBTL Subtotal Percent key 1 through 969 FUNCTIONS gt PGM2 or PGM1 1 2 3 4 Select the PGM1 or PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming Touch the FUNCTIONS button to display the menu and touch the button to display the key list Select the key to program each key Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 4 satisfactorily 5 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key oo Text Parameter RATE Percent rate 0 00 to 100 00 TEXT Description for the percent key Up to 12 characters can be entered Programming of the or sign assigns the premium or discount function to each percent key SIGN Minus amount discount Plus amount premium HALO HALO M HALO High Amount Lockout for the percent key 0 00 to 100 00 RA Received on account 96 ENTRY TYPE ITEM Item 96 SBTL Subtotal 96 224 Group discount key GDSC 1 through GDSC 9 FUNCTIONS GROUP DISCOUNT PGM2
83. some countries because of different package designs Gu EAN code 4901234567894 linked to PLU code 19 Key Operation Display 4901234567894 PLU EAN 0001 CASH_TOTAL 1x2 20 2 20 PLUDOO19 CASH 2 20 2 20 e ITF to PLU conversion ITF Interleaved Two of Five is a standard distribution code usually printed on corrugated cardboard boxes Use this function to sell packaged items marked with ITF codes Gu ITF code 1234567890123456 linked to PLU code 19 Key Operation Display 1234567890123456 ITF CASH TOTAL 132 20 2 20 00019 CASH 2 20 2 20 46 PLU EAN information inquiry view function You can use this function when you want to know the unit price of the PLU EAN item during transaction The PLU EAN can be registered in VIEW mode The unit price of a PLU EAN can be temporarily changed The programmed unit price is not changed 1 Touch the INQ key 2 Enter the PLU EAN Scanning EAN code 60 Scan EAN code PLU EAN code entry PLU EAN code PLU_EAN Direct PLU entry Direct PLU key The following window is displayed INFORMATION Original price PLU information text 3 Select one of the following operations Confirmation only CANCEL Entering the PLU EAN by programmed price ENTER Entering the PLU EAN by override price Override price ENTER Printing on the receipt PRINT 47 H EAN price change funct
84. status no C combo meal no PLU code P0000 Q1 00 0 j Base av Group no 008 1123456 C00 001003 PI PLUOO001 8 50 Price 1 Description for 0 60 Pint price 1 price level 1 2 9 00 E Price 2 Condiment 0 00 Pint price 2 table no P3 9 50 221 Price 3 0 00 4 Touch key text 00001 BLACK YELLOW munii Pint base qty 1 to 9 Yes no TO 0000 1 HG1 47 KP001 Print station Remote printer 1 2 receipt Happy hour 1 to 9 Yes no 0 000 S 1179 000 Minimum stock Stock P 00002 01 00 0 Ti coo 001003 Function programming PI PLUOOOO2 2 10 QOO TOUS 0 70 Amount entry type P2 2 20 open and preset preset 0 00 open inhibited P3 3 20 Price shift 0 00 compulsory inhibited allowed 00002 Printing on clerk report BLACK YELLOW Cresno 01000000000 HITT 1 0 Scal statis Bonus point compulsory enable inhibit ki C2 HG2 5 0 01 0 000 S 658 000 a el 00500 01 0 C00 000002 P1 PLUOO500 1 00 0 00 P 2 00 0 00 P3 3 00 0 00 00500 BLACK YELLOM 00000000000 111111111 1 0 001 TO 0000 CO HGO 0 0 B 0 M 0 000 5 0 000 EAN 40011122233348 O 1 00 0 G 00 000002 Pi ITEMOB 1 10 0 00 P2 ITENOB 1 20 0 00 ITEHO8 1 30 0 00 BLACK YELLOW 298 Condiment entry to menu item compulsory non compulsory Condiment ty
85. the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the FUNCTION KEY button to display the menu and touch the FUNCTION KEY button to display the function key list 3 Select the function key from the list the programming window is displayed 4 Select the required programming item and enter or select each parameter then touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 4 satisfactorily 5 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter KEY TEXT Description for a dept key Up to 16 characters can be displayed KEY COLOR 232 colors Fore color Back color 277 M Journal printer DEVICE CONFIG JOURNAL PRINTER PGM2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the DEVICE CONFIG button to display the menu and touch the JOURNAL PRINTER button to program details 3 Select the required programming item and enter or select each parameter then touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 3 satisfactorily 4 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter 0 SELF TERMINAL No This means local device TERMINAL 1 254 EXCEPT SELF TERMINAL NO RS232 connection SHARED DEVICE TCP IP 4th octet of IP address 0 not connect TCP IP connection CHANNEL 1 5 RS232 connection channel ER 01PU TM T90 PRINTER TM H6000 TM T88 3 T88 4 TM U200 230 278 Receipt report printer
86. this type clerks can be assigned by touching corresponding clerk keys n on the keyboard e Clerk card entry system This type allows clerks to be assigned by scanning the clerk card The card reader is optional lt Sign on operation gt Procedure 1 Clerk code max 4 digits CLK Sign On or touching the CLK n key or setting the contact less clerk key 2 Entering the password if required ENTER SECRET CODE 3 Entering the drawer number if required 25 lt Sign off operation gt After each transaction the clerk will be signed off automatically if the terminal has been programmed for the clerk code entry as automatic clerk sign off mode If the terminal is not programmed to require a clerk code to be entered for each transaction operation clerk stay down mode transaction operations are continued with the same clerk code the clerk code does not need to be re entered In this case touch the CLK to sign off Procedure gt CLK e Contact less clerk key type has the priority over the clerk code entry type that is while a clerk is signed on by the clerk code entry type the other clerk can sign on by the contact less clerk key type the former clerk is signed off e While a clerk is signed on by the contact less clerk key type the other clerk can not sign on by the clerk code entry type e In the clerk code entry type if another clerk is signed on while a clerk is sig
87. transitions mee 19 Function key list using default key labels T eee ee eee eee eee eee eter ee eee rere ree eee eee eee teeter eee reer 20 How to Use the Touch Panel Hee 24 Cursor control by touching option s or items s the window 24 Clerk Assignment Sign on Sign off eee eee eee eee eee eee ee eee ee teeter eee errr eee eee eee ee eee eer ee rere reer eee eee ee 25 Clerk assignment eee ee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee teeter eter eee reer eee reer ee eee eter etter ere reer eee reer ee ee eee ree rere rete 25 Item Selection from the Menu mmm Hee 27 Starting Cash Memory Entry eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee 28 Item Entries HII 29 Registration 29 Single item entries meme enne 29 Repeat REPE 32 Multiplication entries mmm Hmmm 33 Split pricing entries mm 35 Successive multiplication entries mmm HH 37 Scale entries m HH 39 Single item cash sale SICS single item finalize SIF entries mmm 40 Non turnover sales eee 41 Special Entries for PLU EAN mmm eee 42 Promotion function mme 42 PLU EAN link entries m mmm HH 44 EAN learning function m eee 45 EAN ITF to PLU conversion Hee 46 PLU EAN information inquiry view
88. type SELLING PRICE Selects the selling price type AMOUNT DISCOUNT Discount amount max 6 digits 0 to 999999 DISCOUNT Discount rate 0 00 to 100 00 GIVE FREE ITEM PLU EAN code PLU code max 5 digits EAN code 6 13 digits 0 CHEAPER ITEM FREE Quantity max 2 digits 0 to 99 SELLING PRICE Selling price max 6 digits 0 to 999999 TRIP LEVEL1 Trip level for objected item 1 max 2 digits 1 to 99 0 TRIP LEVEL25 Trip level for objected item 25 max 2 digits 1 to 99 0 216 Crate table ARTICLE gt CRATE TABLE PGM2 Table number max 2 digits 1 to 99 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the ARTICLE button to display the menu and touch the CRATE TABLE button to display the table list 3 Touch or enter the crate table number and touch the ENTER key to program the table 4 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 4 satisfactorily 5 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter Crate PLU EAN code PLU code max 5 digits EAN code 6 13 digits 0 CRATE PLU EAN YES COMBINATION FUNC NO TEXT Description for each crate table max 16 characters NUMBER OF BOTTLE Number of bottles in the crate max 2 digits 0 to 99 PRICE Crate table price max 6 digit
89. write mode Used to delete the character or figure at the cursor position Backs up the cursor for deleting the character or figure at the left of the cursor Used to control the cursor left Used to control the cursor right Used to control the cursor down Used to control the cursor up You can enter an upper case letter by using this key Touch this key just before you enter the upper case letter You should touch this key each time you enter an upper case letter Used to change the page of characters Used to enter the capital letters lock mode Used to start a new line Alphanumeric Characters Code table for alpha descriptor programming 032 033 035 036 037 038 040 042 044 045 046 047 e Escher terhe ts roro uc a EE TEE INE 055 056 E 048 063 8 9 9 064 065 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 076 077 078 079 081 082 083 085 087 ose 090 091 092 093 094 095 moos 5 VIWIX Y Z TIN 1 4 _ 096 097 098 099 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 an eem lalbj ejd e f g h i pus pne pns n6 9 m 125 128 17 wr 1 1001 138 1a 0 ser 362 ews
90. 0 ASTE 4 000 Q 21 20 PLUOOO23 3 0000 12 90 ASTE 1 000 0 4 30 PLUOOO23 5 0000 21 50 WASTE 1 000 0 4 3 exTOTAL 21 000 0 87 80 WASTE 8 000 Q 36 80 6 000 Q 24 60 WASTE 3 000 Q 12 10 L3 9 0000 37 10 WASTE 3 000 0 12 10 ME ECC PLU range Price level 1 description sales q ty and total Price level 1 waste q ty and total Price level 2 description sales q ty and total Price level 2 waste q ty and total Price level 3 description sales q ty and total Price level 3 waste q ty and total Total sales q ty and total for price level 1 Total waste q ty and total for price level 1 gt Combo meal PLU sales Total for combo meal PLU sales 155 sin oo EAN code 156 EAN 4007817524732 ITEM 22 000 Q 959 40 WASTE 4 000 0 10 80 A01000 4 0000 10 80 A02000 7 0000 1840 A01 9 0000 524 30 ITEM 24 0000 472 00 ASTE 6 000 Q 18 00 A01000 4 0000 1200 A02000 6 0000 18 00 01 12 000 Q 36 00 ITEMO2 32 0000 996 00 WASTE 4 0000 12 00 A01000 6 0000 8 00 02000 48 00 1 1 000 21 00 490277869241 7 03 2 000 10 20 WASTE 1 000 0 5 10 0 2000 10 40 WASTE 1 000 0 5 20 ITEMO3 3 000 Q 16 50 WASTE 1 000 0 5 50 LI 24 000 Q 59 60 WASTE 5 000 0 15 90 L 26 000 Q 82 40 WASTE 7 000 0 23 20 35 000 Q 112 50 WASTE 5 0
91. 0 MONEY6 50 CENT 0 50 MONEY7 1 EURO 1 00 MONEY8 2 EURO 2 00 MONEY9 5 EURO 5 00 MONEY10 10 EURO 10 00 MONEY11 20 EURO 20 00 MONEY12 50 EURO 50 00 MONEY13 100 EURO 100 00 MONEY14 200 EURO 200 00 MONEY15 500 EURO 500 00 MONEY16 Null 0 MONEY17 Null 0 MONEY18 Null 0 MONEY19 Null 0 MONEY20 Null 0 235 Training text clerk programming TRAINING TEXT CLK PGM2 You can set the text for the training mode title and up to 2 clerks cashiers in training 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the TRAINING TEXT CLK button to program details 3 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 3 satisfactorily 4 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter Description for the training mode title TEXT Up to 8 characters can be entered CLK CSR1 CODE Clerk cashier code in training max 4 digits CLK CSR2 CODE Clerk cashier code in training max 4 digits 236 Function text TEXT gt FUNCTION TEXT PGM2 You can program a maximum of 12 characters for each function by using the following table 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the TEXT button to display the menu and touch the FUNCTION TEXT button to display the function text list 3 Touch or select the function text and touch
92. 0 0 6 40 02 00003 PLUOOOO3 204 000 Q 873 61 PLUOOOO3 4 000 22 00 PLUOOQ03 4 000 Q 12 00 03 P 00001 PLUOOOO 139 000 Q 1164 84 PLUOOQ0 8 000 Q 72 00 PLUOOOO1 8 000 0 76 00 1 9x 00029 PLUOO029 10 000 0 19 20 PLUOOOZ9 3 000 0 x5 10 PLUOO028 5 0000 8 50 20 P 00022 PLUQOOZ2 10 000 0 39 30 PLuo0022 3 000 0 11 70 PLU00022 4 0000 15 60 eT OTAL Li 1189 230 0 4130 06 114 000 0 274 10 142 000 Q 335 70 PLU code Price level 1 description sales q ty and total Total sales q ty and amount for price level 1 163 H PLU EAN zero sales report 14 PLU ZERO SALES PLU PLU code 00038 00038 Description 00039 PLUOQ039 490121234345681 05 4901234567894H1 TEHO Description EAN code PLU EAN zero sales report by associated department IxT PLU ZERO SALES DPI 02 DOZ PLU 00045 PLUOO045 Description of dept Associated dept code PLU code EAN 400123123456 7 1 TEMOG H PLU EAN minimum stock report X1 PLU HINIMUM STOCK 00001 9999999999999 Range P0001 1 PLU code PLUOOOT1 5 000 Stock q ty P 00012 Description PLUOOO12 5 000 00013 PLUO0013 8 000 EAN 40011122233348 TTEHO8 6 000 5 164 PLU EAN sales report by price category eK 1 PLU PRICE CATEGORY 0 01 5 00 P 00002 PLU00002
93. 0 P1 00041 PI FLAVOR Message text H EAN to PLU converting table PGM2 mode PGN2 EAN PLU CONVERT Report type 4901234567894 FP 00019 EAN code Converted PLU code ITF to PLU converting table PGM2 mode 2 TTF PLU CONVERT Report type 12345678901234568 00015 300 ITF code Converted PLU code Crate table PGM2 mode PGM2 CRATE TABLE Report type Crate table no 01 P00013 Crate PLU or EAN Text SINGLE Single function Number of bottles 12 9 80 Price rath gt Assigned PLU codes or EAN CRATEO2 COMBI Combination function 6 5 50 LEVEL P 00010 00012 00013 Promotion table PGM2 mode PGM2 PROMOTION TABLE Report type Promotion table no 001 GLOBAL Type GLOBAL INDIVIDUAL Text PROMO 02 P 00041 Objected items 117 lt lt gt gt lt lt d Fim Se he a LEVELT 03 Level Trip level AMOUNT DISCOUNT 1 m 00 Promotion way Discount amount LEVEL2 00 AMOUNT DISCOUNT 0 E AMOUNT DISCOUNT 0 00 LEVEL4 00 AMOUNT DISCOUNT 0 AMOUNT DISCOUNT 0 00 0 00 23 59 RI MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN 11 1 1 1 1 1 002 PROMO_2 INDIVIDUAL 01 00042 02 00043 P 00044 Level LEVEL1 01 01 02 01 03 02 04 00 05 00 06 00 07 00 08 00 09 00 10 00 11 00 12 00 13 00 14 00 15 00 16
94. 00 0004 CLERKOOO4 1 9999 1 9999 000 000000000000000 00 004 00000018100 01 0000 CLKFOOOS 1 9999 1 9999 000 000000000000000 00 005 00000018100 01 0000 CLKFOOOG CLERKOOO 99 1 9999 000 000000000000000 00 006 00000018100 01 0000 CLKFOO O7 CLERK0Q07 9999 1 9999 000 000000000000000 00 007 00000018100 D1 0000 CLERKOO13 1 9999 000 000000000000000 00 013 00000018100 D1 0000 CLKROQ 1 4 a CLERKOO14 99 000 000000000000000 00 014 orto D1 0000 150015 CLERKOO15 9909 1 9999 000 000000000000000 CLKFOO13 9999 00 015 00000018100 D1 0000 Function programming 00000018100 Customer bill deletion Customer bill printing Happy hour Price level end Price level start Re call GLU VAT shift G C copy GLU system Supervisor clerk Resetting in OPXZ mode H Cashier PGM1 or PGM2 mode PGH2 CASHIER 58 0001 CASHTEROOO1 VIP sale 000 000000000000000 001 00018100 D1 0000 CSMOOO2 CASHIEROOOZ 000 000000000000000 Key number 000 00018100 D1 0000 Manager PGM2 mode 3PGM2 MANAGER Report type Manager code HGR O 1 _ 1 1 1 Secret code NGRRIOZ 0002 3 2255 Employee PGM2 mode 3PGM2 EMPLOYEE EHP 0000000001 DAVID K CLEFOOOO 00 0 0 000 101102 u 1 00 7111111111 L00 L00 L00 EMP 0000000002 EDWARD H
95. 00 0 17 50 COMBO MEAL 40032 132116548 m 28 0000 113 10 WASTE 4 000 0 15 60 A011000 6 0000 930 A02000 4000 15 60 01 000 15 60 ITENO 17 0000 66 30 ASTE 4 000 Q 15 60 A01000 3 0000 11 70 A02000 5 0000 18 50 01 4 0000 15 60 ITEMO7 22 000 Q 85 80 ASTE 4 000 0 15 60 A01000 9000 35 10 A02000 4000 5 60 A01 6 0000 3 40 c Em Price level 1 description sales q ty and amount total Price level 1 waste q ty and amount total Add on code 5 digit Add on code 2 digit Price level 2 description sales q ty and amount total Price level 2 waste q ty and amount total Price level 3 description sales q ty and amount total Price level 3 waste q ty and amount total Total for EAN sales gt Combo meal EAN sales TOTAL Li 29 000 Q 113 10 WASTE 4 000 Q 15 60 12 17 000 Q 000 66 30 WASTE 40000 5 60 L 0000 85 80 3 2 i WASTE 4 000 0 15 60 Combo sales report 1 COMBO SALES 00001 99999 00024 PLUOOOZ4 8 000 Q dcs COMBO 38 000 0 541 80 WAS 8 000 0 8 80 PLUOOO24 5 0000 10 00 WASTE 2 000 0 4 00 COMBO 20 000 0 2 00 COMBO WAS WASTE 6 000 0 6 60 PLUOOO24 6 000 Q 518 00 WASTE 1 000 0 3 00 COBO 26 000 Q 2860 COMBO WASTE 6 000 0 6 60 P 00025 00025 11 0000 3410 WASTE 2 000 Q 6 20 COMBO 38 0000 49 40 COMBO WASTE
96. 00 17 00 18 00 19 00 20 00 21 00 22 00 23 00 24 00 25 00 DISCOUNT 40 00 DEI S C Trip level 1 to 25 Counter 1 to 25 Promotion way Discount rate 301 pe eat Akan a et LEVEL2 01 00 02 00 03 00 04 00 05 00 06 00 07 00 08 00 09 00 10 00 11 00 12 00 13 00 14 00 15 00 16 00 17 00 18 00 19 00 20 00 21 00 22 00 23 00 24 00 25 00 AMOUNT DISCOUNT 0 00 EVEL3 L 01 00 02 00 03 00 04 00 05 00 06 00 07 00 08 00 09 00 10 00 11 00 12 00 13 00 14 00 15 00 16 00 17 00 18 00 19 00 20 00 21 00 22 00 23 00 24 00 25 00 AMOUNT DISCOUNT 0 00 LEVEL4 01 00 02 00 03 00 04 00 05 00 06 00 07 00 08 00 09 00 10 00 11 00 12 00 13 00 14 00 15 00 16 00 17 00 18 00 19 00 20 00 21 00 22 00 23 00 24 00 25 00 poe DISCOUNT 0 00 LEVEL 01 00 02 00 03 00 04 00 05 00 1 16 00 17 00 18 00 19 00 20 00 21 00 22 00 23 00 24 00 25 00 AMOUNT DISCOUNT 0 00 00 23 59 RI MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN 1111111 Promotion way Discount amount EAN other functions PGM2 mode Report type Non PLU format setting Delete period 2 EAN OTHERS EAN NON PLU 20 540012 02 450012 EAN DELETE PRESS CODE 1 001 2 001 3 001 4 001 5 001 Press code function 302 H PLU information text PGM2 mode PGN2 PLU INFORMATION Report type Table no 0001 gt PLU information text TEXT 2 1 TEXT 2 2 TEXT 2 3 PLU menu key PGM2 mode 3PGH2
97. 00 2 00 1000008 CASH 4 00 4 00 69 When the GLU code is selected from the opened GLU list Key Operation OPENED_GLU Selection of GLU 1001 PLU 00008 CASH_TOTAL 70 Display OPENED GLU UVI 1 1 00 1 00 00003 1x2 00 2 00 00008 CASH 4 00 Room GLU entry e New order Procedure Room GLU code 1 to 9999 9 ROOM Selection of the Guest no entry price level max 2 digits I Item entries NBAL G C RCPT FINAL gt SLIP m XXXXXX gt RA 4 Payment operations gt VP When paid in full settlement Key Operation Display 5 ROOM ROOHIES Selection of the price level 3 06 28 7 32 CLERKOOOL PLU 00002 1x2 10 2 10 PLU 00003 PLUOOOOZ NBAL 15 30 5 30 PLUOO003 xri 7 40 e Additional ordering Procedure OPENED ROOM CANCEL gt To cancel gt Select the room GLU code ENTER Touch the room GLU code Room GLU code ROOM 1 to 9999 9 gt Enter the room GLU code ENTER Guest no entry max 2 digits m Item entries L When paid in full settlement Ir NBAL gt G C RCPT FINAL gt SLIP gt XXXXXX RA T Pay
98. 0000 0 0 0000 L01 L 02 LO LO MEEO 1 00 L 00 EMP 0000000003 ERIC T HGRFOO 18 0 0000 101102103100 7111111111 1 00 L 00 L 00 EMP OO00000005 JIMMY P 10000 01 0 0 00000 10010100100 Ti L00 L00 L00 Report type Employee code Employee name Secret code Working time shift Report type Cashier code Cashier name Drawer number Secret code Operation mode programming PGM2 PGM1 PRICE X1 Z1 X2Z2 AUTO KEY FLASH SD CARD AUTO MENU 1 to 6 Function programming 00018100 Customer bill deletion Customer bill printing Happy hour Price level end Price level start VAT shift copy Resetting OPXZ mode Standard number of working hours Job location numbers Linked clerk code Linked manager code 309 Working time shift PGM2 mode 3PGM2 WORKING SHIFT Report type SHIFT 6 PGN2 JOB LOCATE TBL Report type Job location table number 01 n LOCATION 1 Text Overtime pay rate Salary pay amount 5 00 OT 1 50 310 Optional features PGM2 mode PGM2 OPTIONAL OPTIONAL FUNCTION PROHIBIT OPX Z REPORT ENABLE PAID OUT PUBLIC REFUND RETURN PUBLIC ISSUE TEM VOID PUBLIC NO ISSUED VOID PUBLIC SBTL VOID PUBLIC ITEM VP ENABLE INTERMEDIATE GLU PUBLIC GLU FINALIZE ENABLE PUBLIC WASTE MODE PUBLIC INTERMEDIATE FINAL ENABLE OPEN GLU DISPLAY DISABLE EAN LEARN
99. 00003 7 XIQTY 6 RETURN PLU EAN M1 00 285 AMOUNT 2 RETURN DEPT PLUDOOO6 CASH TOTAL 142 85 07 02 CHANGE 97 Printing of non add code numbers Enter a non add code number such as a guest code number and credit card number within a maximum of 16 digits and touch the key at any point during the entry of a sale Your POS terminal will print at once Key Operation Display PLU 00002 nm 123450 4 1x1 00 1 00 PLU 00003 PLUOOQ0 CASH TOTAL 0000000000123450 1x1 00 1 00 00003 CASH 2 00 ea TOTAL 2 00 Printing of free text You can perform the free text entry before or after item entry Programmed free text can be printed out by entering the corresponding text code and touching the TEXT key or by touching the corresponding direct text key TEXT n e Direct key entry Q ty gt TEXT n When the q ty is 1 it is unnecessary to enter the q ty Q ty gt e Text code entry Q ty gt x QTY gt Text code TEXT When the is 1 it is unnecessary to enter the q ty Q ty gt x QTY gt e Text entry by the list Q ty gt x QTY TEXT Selecting the text When the is 1 it is unnecessary to enter the q ty Q ty gt x QTY gt e You can void the free text by cursor or touching void operation e You can enter free texts before item entry by default If you want to enter free tex
100. 002 DIFFER ST PLU 00003 CASH TOTAL Display PLU00002 DIFF ST 2 00 1x1 00 1 00 PLUDODO3 DIFF ST 1 00 CASH 3 00 3 00 63 Finalization of Transaction The following types of media can be used for the finalization of transactions e Cash e Check e Credit Charge The direct finalization or the amount tendering can be performed to finalize the transaction e Amount tendering Procedure Cash Q ty gt Tendered amount CASH TOTAL or CASH n 2 5 Check n Q ty X QTY L Tendered amount CHECK or CHECK n n 2 5 Charge n Q ty X QTY Tendered amount CREDIT n n 1 9 e The charge tendering is allowed when its media is programmed for compulsive tendering e The amount tendering is disallowed when the sales subtotal full subtotal is zero or negative e The amount tendering for the partial payment short tendering can be allowed e The change amount is paid by a ticket when its media is programmed for CHANGE SELECT BY TICKET Example Key Operation Display 0001 SUBTOTAL 132 10 2 10 600 CREDIT 1 PLU00002 400 CHECK 2 CREDITI 6 00 800 CASH TOTAL CHECK2 4 00 CASH 8 00 CHANGE 0 10 The following contents is displayed when the change amount is paid by ticket 0001 1x2 10 2 10 00002 CREDITI 6 00 CHECK2 4 00 CASH 8 00 TICKET 0 10 6
101. 01 19 0 PLUOOQQ8 ENTER BS QUOC Bill Separation 10 00 2 00 PLUDOOOS 1 1 50 1 50 PLUOOOO1 1x6 20 6 20 PLUDOOOG 81 82 CASH_TOTAL NBAL 2 90 2 50 Bill separating by amount Key Operation 1002 GLU B S AMOUNT 250 ENTER CASH_TOTAL NBAL Display ENTER AMOUNT PARTIAL PAY 1x2 90 2 90 PLU00003 125 10 29 10 PLUOOQQ PARTIAL PAY 2 50 v RUrTOO2 0001 00003 125 10 2 10 PLUOOQQ PARTIAL PAY 2 90 CASH 2 90 BS RETURN NBAL v 0001 83 Bill separating by person Key Operation 1003 GLU B S _PERSON 2 ENTER Select 1 IND PAYMENT CASH_TOTAL 84 Display ENTER OF GUEST PARTIAL PAY auwioo3 1x13 20 15 20 00003 182 60 2 60 00005 PARTIAL PAY 8 90 v Gui003 000 00003 182 60 2 60 00005 PARTIAL PAY 8 90 CASH 8 90 Press BS RETURN B S _RETURN CASH_TOTAL 1x15 20 15 20 00003 182 60 2 60 1000005 PARTIAL PAY 8 90 v RUTTOOS 00003 182 60 2 50 PLUOOOOS PARTIAL PAY 8 90 CASH 8 90 85 H Transaction migration This POS terminal allows you to migrate the transaction of non GLU type to the GLU file entries E code generation For automatic GLU PBLU GLU code GLU L L Guest no entry 1 to 9999 9 max 2
102. 1 combo waste q ty and total P PLUOOO42 3 000 0 P000 aa 1 000 0 ee n 000 d q WASTE 1 000 0 ATOTAL LI 1082 230 0 WASTE 26 000 0 COMBO 1347 000 0 4031 63 112 30 207 40 36 000 Q 52 40 44 000 Q 181 20 WASTE 15 000 0 58 10 CONBO 69 0000 90 90 COMBO WASTE 21 000 0 27 70 L3 48 000 Q 209 80 WASTE 10 000 0 40 10 COMBO 93 000 Q 122 90 721 0000 27 70 EAN 4003213217654 ITEMO7 29 0000 5113 10 WASTE 4 0000 15 60 A01000 6 0000 2340 000 4 0000 580 4 00 15 60 ITENO 17 0000 365 30 WASTE 4 000 0 15 60 A01000 3 0000 11 70 000 5 0000 1950 4 000 15 60 ITEMO 22 0000 85 80 TE 4 000 Q 15 60 A01000 90004 35 10 A02000 4000 15 60 Al 0000 30 4902778692417 ITEHOS 2 0000 10 20 WASTE 1 000 Q 5 10 2 0000 10 40 WASTE 1 000 0 5 20 ITEMO3 3 000 0 16 50 WASTE 1 000 0 5 50 c qc DE A Total for price level 1 EAN code Price level 1 description sales q ty and total Price level 1 waste q ty and total Add on code 5 digit Add on code 2 digit 159 s 1 000 Q 23 3 WASTE 5 000 0 20 12 18 000 0 76 70 WASTE 5 000 Q 20 80 25 0000 102 30 HASTE 5 000 0 21 10 70 gt Total for price level 1 H PLU EAN individual group report eX 1 PLU IND GROUP 00001 00001 139 000 0 1164 84
103. 1 or PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the PERSONNEL button to display the menu and touch the CLERK button to display the clerk list 3 Touch or select the clerk and touch the ENTER key to program details 4 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 4 satisfactorily 5 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter SECRET CODE Secret code max 4 digits 0001 to 9999 0000 NAME Name for the clerk Up to 12 characters can be entered CLERKxxxx Key number 0 through 255 KEY No re The entry of 0 disables the use of real clerk keys SUPERVISOR YES Enables supervisor clerk NO Disables supervisor clerk VIP1 SALE DISABLE Disables VIP sale ENABLE Enables VIP sale VIP2 SALE DISABLE Disables VIP sale ENABLE Enables VIP sale VIP3 SALE DISABLE Disables VIP sale ENABLE Enables VIP sale GLU Makes GLU system compulsory GLU TYPE ROOM GLU Makes ROOM GLU compulsory NON COMPULSORY Makes GLU ROOM GLU system non compulsory DISABLE Disables guest check copy G C COPY ENABLE Enables guest check copy VAT SHIET STATE Enables VAT shift entry NOT Disables VAT shift entry DRAWER2 DRAWER No DRAWER1 NONE START GLU Starting GLU code 1 to 9999 END GLU Ending GLU code 1 to 9999 START ROOM GLU Starting ROOM G
104. 100 00 5275 6 H PLU EAN stock report Group 1 text gt Group 1 sales q ty and total Plus dept total 1 PLU STOCK 00001 9999999999999 Range PLU P 00001 PLU code PLUOO001 151 000 5 Stock q ty 00002 Description 00002 86 000 5 00003 00003 211 000 5 ee pe ee 400321321 76544 73 000 S 40078175247328 2 57 000 5 4901212343456 EAN code 5 102 000 5 4901234567894 ITEMO 92 000 S 4902778692417 ITEMO3 61 000 5 161 H PLU EAN top 20 sales report by sales amount XT PLU TOP 20 Ranking AMOUNT 401 P 00001 PLUOOOO1 139 000 Q 1154 84 PLUOOOO1 8 0000 72 00 PLUOO001 8 000 0 76 00 02 00003 PLUOQOO3 204 000 Q 9873 61 PLUOOOO3 4 0000 22 00 PLUOOOO3 4 000 0 x12 00 03 00008 PLUOOQ08 67 0000 432 94 3195 P 00015 PLUOO015 4 000 Q 34 00 20 00029 PLUCOOZS 10 000 0 19 20 PLUOO029 3 000 0 5 10 PLUOO028 5 000 0 8 50 Li 1176 230 0 4145 39 L2 113 000 Q 272 10 L3 141 000 0 332 70 162 PLU code Price level 1 description sales q ty and total Total sales q ty and amount for price level 1 H PLU EAN top 20 sales report by sales quantity Ranking X 1 PLU TOP 20 QUANTITY 401 P 00002 PLUOOQ02 305 230 Q 5305 77 PLUOOOO2 5 000 0 11 00 PLUOOOO2 2 00
105. 3 4 Change PGM function Total and change amount printing With foreign Domestic only 5 Change PGM function Exchange1 amount printing for total validation print YES NO and Total validation print amount printing With foreign Domestic only 6 Change PGM function Exchange1 calculation method Division Multiplication 9 Change PGM function Converting the preset unit prices of departments PLUs EANs to the ones in EURO currency YES NO 10 Set Exchange1 currency descriptor as the suitable data 11 Set Exchange1 TAB as the suitable This job cannot set the following additional EURO function You must set the following items by each programming after executing the automatic EURO modification operation 1 Exchange rate 2 Check Credit operation for Exchange1 YES NO 3 Foreign currency drawer number if installed Also when you are using any of the EXCH2 through EXCH9 keys you must change these rates 330 14 Operator Maintenance In Case of Power Failure When power is lost the POS terminal retains its memory contents and all information on sales totals e When power failure is encountered in the POS terminal idle state or during an entry the POS terminal returns to the normal state of operation after power recovery Before Calling for Service The malfunction shown in the left hand column below labeled Condition does not necessarily indicate functional faults o
106. 3 Select or enter the customer code and touch the ENTER key to program details 4 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 4 satisfactorily 5 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter NAME Enter a customer s name max 16 characters ADDRESS On the second line enter the customer s address max 40 characters VAT ID VAT ID max 16 characters AUTO GROUP DISC Automatic group discount number 0 to 10 PRICE LEVEL Price level 0 to 8 285 Customer control programming CUSTOMER gt CUSTOMER PROG PGM2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the CUSTOMER button to display the menu and touch the CUSTOMER PROG button to program details 3 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 3 satisfactorily 4 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter Preset a period to delete customer detail data PERIOD MONTH Enter the period in a unit of month 01 to 99 If you enter 00 the customer detail data will not be deleted LIMIT CHARGE Limit of charge amount max 8 digits 0 to 99999999 NOTE If the following condition is satisfied its code is deleted using the deleting operation Date of the deleting Year Month
107. 4 e Direct finalization Procedure Cash CASH_TOTAL or CASH n 2 5 Check n 2 CHECK or CHECK n n 2 5 Charge CREDIT n n 1 9 e The direct charge function is allowed when its media is programmed for prohibited tendering Key Operation l SUBTOTAL 1000 CREDIT 1 500 CHECK 2 700 CASH TOTAL CREDIT 2 Display 1x14 00 14 00 31000005 CREDITI 10 00 CHECK2 3 00 CASH 7 00 CREDIT2 8 00 ver TOTAL 30 00 65 Computation of VAT Value Added Tax Tax VAT tax system The POS terminal may be programmed for the following six tax systems by your authorized SHARP dealer e Automatic VAT 1 through 6 system Automatic operation method using programmed percentages This system at settlement calculates VAT for taxable 1 taxable 2 taxable 3 taxable 4 taxable 5 and taxable 6 subtotals by using the corresponding programmed percentages e Automatic tax 1 through 6 system Automatic operation method using programmed percentages This system at settlement calculates taxes for taxable 1 taxable 2 taxable 3 taxable 4 taxable 5 and taxable 6 subtotals by using the corresponding programmed percentages and also adds the calculated taxes to those subtotals respectively e Manual VAT 1 through 6 system Manual entry method using programmed percentages SUBTOTAL gt VAT This system provides the VAT calculation for taxable 1 taxable 2 taxable 3 taxable 4 taxabl
108. 6 5 000 0 DPT 16 GUEST 10 BTTL TL 5 000 0 5 bottle return dept counter and total 152 Ratio of dept group 1 sales amount to dept total 017 5 000 0 007 77 GUEST 20 BITL 5 000 0 018 4 000 0 DPT 18 GUEST 30 WNT TLI 4000 19 3 000 Q DPI 19 GUEST 21 NT TL2 3 000 D20 2 000 1 DT ZO GUEST 2Q NT TL3 2 000 0 8 60 8 60 11 82 4 92 9 79 9 79 10 93 10 93 bottle return dept counter and total L Non turnover 1 counter and total Individual department group report Dept code DOE DEPT IND GROUP Sales q ty 987 230 Q Dept description Sales amount Guest counter Item deduction q ty Item deduction amount gt Group 1 text sales q ty and total DPT O 3607 87 GUEST 147 Q DEDUCTION 84 3 85 DOZ 6 000 Q DPT 0Z 11 94 GUEST 30 DEDUCTION 1Q 0 40 GROUP1 993 230 0 3619 81 DEDUCTION 90 4 05 gt Group 1 deduction total q ty and total 153 Department group total report D SE DEPT GROUP TOTAL GROUP 1039 230 0 95 82 gii TE Group 1 text sales q ty and total GROUP 12 000 0 49 el GROUPS 8 0000 0 74 29 10 DEPT TL 1079 230 Q 100 00 3952 31 DEPT 6 000 0 15 60 7 000 Q 38 06 HASH 3 0000 4 5 1 BTTL TL 5 0000 E 05 BITL 5 0001 ai 8 60 NT TLI 4 0000 1 2
109. 8532 PLU EAN YT on CASH TOTAL a 01 CASH 8 70 8 70 31 Repeat entries You can use this function for repetitive entries department PLU EAN of the same items Multiple items can also be repeated by using the key Procedure Touch the or same key department PLU EAN key after an item entry or touch the desired item s on the receipt window then touch the key eum Key Operation Display 1200 Department 6 10001 PLU00001 600 AMOUNT 5 DEPT 1x8 70 8 70 DEPT DPT O1 DEPT 1x8 70 8 70 PLU 00001 DPT O1 CASH 89 20 860 AMOUNT PLU 00001 1 89 20 1 PLU_EAN 4901780438532 PLU_EAN CASH_TOTAL 32 H Multiplication entries Use this feature when you need to enter two or more of the same items This feature helps you when you sell multiples of items or need to enter quantities that contain decimals When the kitchen printer is used under Issuing S D receipts by the number of times of multiplication Yes programming the number of multiplier may be limited by Maximum number of ticket issuing programming e Department entries For using a programmed unit price Q ty gt X QTY gt Department key Q ty gt X QTY Department code 1 99 gt DEPT For entering a unit price Q ty gt X QTY Unit price max 8 digits Department key Q ty gt X QTY gt Uni
110. 9 UPC EAN code max 13 digits EAN13 EAN8 UPC A 1 Select the PGM1 or PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the ARTICLE button to display the menu and touch the PLU EAN button to display the each PLU EAN 3 Touch the direct PLU key or the LIST MENU key to open the PLU list Select now the PLU to be programmed and touch the ENTER key You can also touch the corresponding PLU in the PLU list to program this By touching the SELECT SCREEN key you can select other screens which show other direct PLU keys 4 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 4 satisfactorily For the programming items refer to the following tables same as dynamic EAN 5 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key PLU range ARTICLE gt PLU RANGE PGM2 PLU code max 5 digits 1 to 99999 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the ARTICLE button to display the menu and touch the PLU RANGE button to display the PLU range window 3 Enter the following range data and touch the ENTER key to program the range PLU Text Parameter START CODE Start code of the range max 5 digits 00000 99999 END CODE End code of the range max 5 digits 00000 99999 Type for the operation DELETE Delete MAINTENANCE Maintenance NEW amp MAINTENANCE New create and m
111. AL for GLU max 12 characters 37 NBAL NBAL for GLU 38 SCM Starting cash memory 39 SCM Starting cash memory 40 EXCH1 IS Exchange 1 is 41 215 2 42 EXCH3 IS 3 43 EXCH4 IS 4 44 EXCH5 IS Exchange 5 is 45 EXCH6 IS Exchange 6 is 46 EXCH7 IS Exchange 7 is 47 EXCH8 IS Exchange 8 is 48 915 Exchange 9 is 49 CASH IS Cash is 50 CHECK IS Check is 51 CA CHK ID Cash check in drawer 52 GUEST Guest 53 NON COM Non commission sale 54 VIP1 SALE VIP1 sale 55 VIP2 SALE VIP2 sale 56 VIP3 SALE VIP3 sale 57 WASTE TL WASTE total 58 ORDER TL Order total 59 PAID TL Paid total 60 TRAN OUT Transfer out 61 TRAN IN Transfer in 62 TIP PAID Tip paid 63 DOM CUR1 Domestic currency 1 64 DOM CUR2 Domestic currency 2 65 DOM CUR3 Domestic currency 3 66 DOM CUR4 Domestic currency 4 67 DOM CUR5 Domestic currency 5 68 DOM CUR6 Domestic currency 6 69 DOM CUR7 Domestic currency 7 70 DOM CUR8 Domestic currency 8 71 DOM CUR9 Domestic currency 9 72 NT TL1 Non turnover total 1 73 NT TL2 Non turnover total 2 74 NT TL3 Non turnover total 3 75 CHECK ID Check in drawer 76 TICKET Ticket 77 DEPT TL dept total 78 DEPT dept total 238 No Default text Classification Note
112. AT 3 VAT 3 VAT 4 VAT 4 VAT 5 VAT 5 VAT 6 VAT 6 NET1 NET1 NET2 NE VD SBTL VD SBTL VD MGR VD NGR VD CC VAT 3 CC VAT 3 CC TAK D CC TAX DELE TRANSACTION TRANSACTIONS LICENSE END a END H Function key PGM2 mode PGH2 FUNCTION KEY Report type 001 1 Key text BLACK SILVER Key color 002 1 BLACK SILVER 003 2 BLACK SILVER 004 3 BLACK SILVER 005 BLACK SILVER 006 BLACK SILVER 007 6 BLACK SILVER 008 BLACK SILVER 627 VIP_SALE2 WHITE 202 628 VIP SALES WHITE 202 629 POINT REDEMP WHITE NAVY 630 MASK WHITE GREEN 631 BANK CONSOLE WHITE AQUA 632 E MAI BLACK AQUA 314 Function menu key PGM2 mode PGM2 FUNCTION MENU KEY 01 FUNCTION HENU 1 01 OPENED GLU 048 02 OPENED ROOM 049 03 ROOM 495 04 9 292 05 9 301 06 P 518 07 498 08 POINT REDEMP 629 09 RECALL TRANS 501 10 TRANS AUT 508 11 VATSFT 461 12 TRANS_IN 509 13 AMOUNT 176 14 BILL 519 15 RETURN 282 02 FUNCTIONHENU 2 01 EIN 490 02 BREAK 492 03 491 04 ADVANCE ORDER 524 05 CORRECT ORDER 526 06 CREDIT ORDER 525 07 VATSFT_ITEN 461 08 POINT REDENP 629 09 MASK 630 10 DEPTE 168 11 CRATER 21 12 INTER HED 502 13 LEVEL 038 14 VIP SALET 626 15 CUST BILL 512 30 FUNCTION MENU30 01 INHIBIT 02 INHIBIT s n 03 INHIBIT pe 04 INHIBIT gag 05 INHIBIT 06 INHIBIT PS 07 INHIBIT 08 INHIBIT tik 09 INHIBIT Ka 10 INHIBIT me n INHIBIT
113. CANCEL or EXIT key 250 Terminal programming TERMINAL PGM2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the TERMINAL button to program details 3 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 3 satisfactorily 4 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter MACHINE NAME Description for the terminal max 16 characters MACHINE Machine number max 6 digits 0 to 999999 Enter a number max 4 digits 0 to 9999 that is one less than the desired starting CONSECUTIVE number BILL NUMBER Enter a number max 4 digits 0 to 9999 that is the desired starting number Alarm length of time with drawer opening 0 to 255 seconds Your POS terminal starts to monitor how long the drawer is kept open the moment the DRAWER ALARM drawer is opened at the end of a transaction in the REG VOID mode It stops the time monitoring when a valid key is touched for the next transaction Screen save mode timer max 2 digits 0 to 99 minutes SCREEN SAVE If the number 0 is entered the POS terminal will turn the display off after 100 min if it remains idle Auto sign off timer max 3 digits 0 to 999 seconds AUTO SIGN OFF If the number 0 is entered auto sign off function is prohibited License warning day 0 to 99 days 10 MENS MORNING If the
114. CK PLU stock report Starting PLU code ending PLU code 1 to 99999 08 PLU ZERO SALES PLU zero sales report TAS 2 BY DEPT department code 1 to 99 09 PLU MINIMUM STOCK _ PLU minimum stock report Starting PLU code ending PLU code 1 to 99999 10 PLU PRICE CATEGORY PLU EAN by price category Starting price ending price 11 PLU HOURLY GROUP PLU hourly group report Starting time ending time 0 to 2345 12 PROMOTION PLU Promotion PLU report Starting promotion code ending promotion code 1 to 99999 13 TRANSACTION Transaction report 14 TL ID Total in drawer report 15 COMMISSION SALES Commission sales report 16 TAX Tax report 17 CHIEF Chief report 18 All CLERK Full clerk report 19 All CASHIER Full cashier report 20 EMPLOYEE Empioyee repori Starting employee code ending employee code 1 to 9999999999 21 EMP ADJUSTMENT Employee adjustment report starting employee code ending employer code 1 to 9999999999 270 No Report text Classification Note Starting employee code ending employee code 22 EMP ACTIVE STATUS Employee active status report 1 to 9999999999 23 HOURLY Hourly report Starting time ending time 0 to 2345 24 LABOR COST Labor cost percent report 25 EMP OVER TIME Empl ti Starting employee code ending employee code mployee over time repo 1 to 9999999999 26 DAILY NET Daily net report 27 GL
115. CONFIG gt POLE DISPLAY PGM2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the DEVICE CONFIG button to display the menu and touch the POLE DISPLAY button to program details 3 Select the required programming item and enter or select each parameter then touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 3 satisfactorily 4 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter Waiting time until the message is displayed on the pole display 0 to 999seconds WAITING TIME When you program as 0 no message is displayed Tax programming TAX PGM2 1 2 3 4 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming Touch the TAX button to display the tax list tax1 to tax6 Select the required tax from the list to program details Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 4 satisfactorily 5 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key 2 oo Text Parameter Minus rate RATE SIGN Plus rate TAX RATE Tax rate max 7 digits 0 0000 to 999 9999 284 Customer code CUSTOMER gt CUSTOMER PGM2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the CUSTOMER button to display the menu and touch the CUSTOMER button to display the customer list
116. CTED ITEM PGM2 Objected items for promotion max 25 items Text Parameter PLU EAN Select to program a PLU EAN DEPT Select to program a department ITEM KIND GROUP Select to program a PLU group INHIBIT Inhibited PLU EAN CODE PLU code max 5 digits EAN code 6 13 digits 0 DEPT Dept code 1 99 0 GROUP Group no 1 99 0 e Trip level ARTICLE PROMOTION TABLE LEVEL1 through LEVELS PGM2 e For global type Text Parameter WAY Promotion way AMOUNT DISCOUNT Selects the amount discount type DISCOUNT Selects the percent discount type GIVE FREE ITEM Selects the give free item type CHEAPER ITEM FREE Selects the cheaper item free type SELLING PRICE Selects the selling price type AMOUNT DISCOUNT Discount amount max 6 digits 0 to 999999 DISCOUNT Discount rate 0 00 to 100 00 GIVE FREE ITEM PLU EAN code PLU code max 5 digits EAN code 6 13 digits 0 CHEAPER ITEM FREE Quantity max 2 digits 0 to 99 SELLING PRICE Selling price max 6 digits 0 to 999999 TRIP LEVEL Trip level max 2 digits 1 to 99 0 e For individual type Text Parameter WAY Promotion way AMOUNT DISCOUNT Selects the amount discount type DISCOUNT Selects the percent discount type GIVE FREE ITEM Selects the give free item type CHEAPER ITEM FREE Selects the cheaper item free
117. D to take a flash report of cash in drawer or SALES TOTAL to take a flash report of sales total 143 M Report list Operating modes Report Description 2 1 21 X2iz2 Data to be entered Remarks GENERAL General report 1 71 X2 Z2 Department Department code DEPT GROUP Department by group report x1 X2 The range can be specified by entering start and end codes DEPT IND GROUP ene department Group v x1 X2 Department group no 1 to 17 DEPT GROUP TOTAL PePartment group total z x1 x2 report lt PLU EAN gt PLU EAN code PLU PLU EAN sales report X1 Z1 2 22 The range can be specified by entering start and end codes PLU PICK UP PLU EAN pickup report ad loea 2 the new picking table or the last picking table PLU code COMBO SALES Combo sales report x1 X2 The range can be specified by entering start and end codes 1 Using the new picking table or COMBO PICKUP Combo sales pickup report x1 x2 the last picking table PLU BY DEPT by 1 21 X2 Z2 Department code associated department PLU IND GROUP aes individual group x1 X2 PLU EAN group no PLU GROUP TOTAL PLU EAN group total report x1 x2 PLU EAN code PLU STOCK PLU EAN stock report X1 The range can be specified by entering start and end codes PLU STOCK PICK UP PLU EAN stoc
118. DEVICE CONFIG gt RECEIPT REPORT PRINTER PGM2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the DEVICE CONFIG button to display the menu and touch the RECEIPT REPORT PRINTER button to program details 3 Select the required programming item and enter or select each parameter then touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 3 satisfactorily 4 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter TERMINAL 0 SELF TERMINAL No This means local device 1 254 EXCEPT SELF TERMINAL NO RS232 connection SHARED DEVICE TCP IP 4th octet of IP address CHANNEL 0 not connect TCP IP connection 1 5 RS232 connection channel PRINTER ER 01PU TM T90 TM H6000 TM T88 3 T88 4 TM U200 230 TM T88 3 4 LOGO AUTO CUTTER NO Disables auto cutter YES Enables auto cutter HEAD LOGO PRINT PRE PRINT Pre print the header logo EACH ISSUE Header logo is printed at each receipt issuing RCPT LENGTH Minimum length for bill on receipt 0 to 30 lines 279 Bill printer DEVICE CONFIG gt BILL PRINTER PGM2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the DEVICE CONFIG button to display the menu and touch the BILL PRINTER button to program details 3 Select the required programming item and enter or select each parameter then touch the ENT
119. DIT button to display the credit key list 3 Select the credit key to program details 4 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 4 satisfactorily 5 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter TEXT Description for the credit key Up to 12 characters can be entered A Significant digit for HALO 1 through 9 HALO B Number of zeros to follow the significant digit for HALO 0 through 8 AB is the same as A x 108 COMPULSORY Makes bill printing compulsory BILL PRINT NON COMPULSORY Makes bill printing non compulsory FOOTER PRINT This item decides whether or not your POS terminal should print a message at the foot of a receipt when a specified credit key is used YES Enables footer printing on the receipt NO Disables footer printing on the receipt NAME amp ADDRESS Threshold amount to prompt the name and address entry max 8 digits 0 to 99999999 AMOUNT ENTRY You may select compulsory or non compulsory amount tender COMPULSORY Compulsory amount tendered entry INHIBITED Inhibits amount tendered entry You can make the non add code entry compulsory when a credit entry is accepted NON ADD COMPULSORY Compulsory non add code entry NON COMPULSORY Non compulsory non add code entry EFT COMPULSORY Makes EFT function compulsory NON COMPULSORY Makes EFT function non compulsory
120. E 168 41 188 Customer ordering report 24 When you take a Z report Z2 is printed instead of X2 CUSTOMER ORDERING 22 10 2008 CU ADY 0 RDER Customer advance order Ordering number 08 01 2008 0 00 Date Time 00 Balance ix 1 00 1 00 PLUOOOO1 x 1 0 1 00 PLUOOOO2 Ix 1 00 1 00 PLUOO03 Ix 2 00 2 00 PLUOOQ08 5 00 HW 22 10 2008 15 00 0 00 1 5 30 5 30 PLUDOQO3 1 3 40 x3 40 PLUOQ004 8 70 37 T indicates that the transaction was handled by a 22 10 2008 15 00 clerk under training 0 00 1 2 50 2 50 PLUOOQ0OS 2 50 CREDIT CUST ADV Credit customer advance order Customer number Consecutive number 08 01 2008 0 00 iye 0 00 x 1 0 1 00 1 2 00 2 00 00008 1 1 00 4 00 400005 4 00 2 72 stacked report You can print multiple X2 Z2 reports in sequence under a single transaction In this case you need to program in advance which X2 Z2 reports should be printed Refer to Stacked report under Section POS Setting Data in Chapter 10 Programming of INSTRUCTION MANUAL 189 Non accessed customer report xs NON ACCESSED CUST 800000001 1 0001 Customer code Customer 110001 Name ADDRESS 1 Address VAT ID I VAT ID 90 220 71 CHARGE 197 41 0900000001122 NAME 7 ADDRESS 7 VAT IDA11 0 00 CHARGE 0 00 0900000002233 8 ADDRES
121. EAN taxable 1 NO Makes the PLU EAN non taxable 1 TAXABLEG YES Makes the PLU EAN taxable 6 NO Makes the PLU EAN non taxable 6 PINT PRICE1 Pint price of price level 1 max 6 digits PINT PRICE8 Pint price of price level 8 max 6 digits PINT BASE QTY Base quantity for each PLU EAN that should be applied only to half double pint entries max 2 digits 0 0 to 9 9 1 HAPPY HOUR1 YES Enables the happy hour 1 entry NO Disables the happy hour 1 entry HAPPY HOUR9 YES Enables the happy hour 9 entry NO Disables the happy hour 9 entry GROUP DISCOUNT 1 YES Discountable NO Non discountable GROUP DISCOUNT10 YES Discountable NO Non discountable HOURLY GR 1 PLU hourly group number to classify PLUs for PLU hourly group reports 1 through 9 0 HOURLY GR 2 PLU hourly group number to classify PLUs for PLU hourly group reports 1 through 9 0 HOURLY GR 3 PLU hourly group number to classify PLUs for PLU hourly group reports 1 through 9 0 To be continued 209 Text Parameter BONUS POINT Bonus points for a PLU EAN max 7 digits 0 MINIMUM STOCK Minimum stock quantity for a PLU EAN max 7 digits 0 NON DEL Not delete non accessed EANS by 21 report NON ACCESS DEL BY 7 Delete non accessed EANS by 71 report For PLU it is fixed to NON DEL a Happy hour ARTICLE HAPPY HOUR PGM2 Happy hour happy hour 1 to happy hour 9
122. ER key Repeat this step 3 satisfactorily 4 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter TERMINAL 0 SELF TERMINAL No This means local device 1 254 EXCEPT SELF TERMINAL NO RS232 connection SHARED DEVICE TCP IP 4th octet of IP address CHANNEL 0 not connect TCP IP connection 1 5 RS232 connection channel PRINTER ER 01PU TM T90 TM H6000 TM U295 TM T88 3 T88 4 TM U200 230 TM T88 3 4 LOGO INITIAL FEED Initial line feed for a slip 0 to 64 lines SLIP MAX LINE Maximum number of lines printable on a slip 0 to 99 VP PRINT TIMES Number of times of validation printing 0 to 9 1 PAPER SHEET TWO OR MORE Two or more copy sheet ONE SHEET One sheet 280 Remote printer DEVICE CONFIG gt KP 1 through KP 9 PGM2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the DEVICE CONFIG button to display the menu and touch the KP 1 through KP 9 button to program details 3 Select the required programming item and enter or select each parameter then touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 3 satisfactorily 4 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter 0 SELF TERMINAL No This means local device TERMINAL 1 254 EXCEPT SELF TERMINAL NO RS232 connection SHARED DEVICE TCP IP 4th octet of IP address 0
123. F or SICS department RECEIPT TYPE Receipt type selection When the receipt type is single double or single double addition DOUBLE Double receipt type SINGLE Single receipt type To be continued 205 Text Parameter YES Prints the department sales information on the clerk report PRNTON CEK NO Prints nothing on the clerk report ITEM VP COMPULSORY Makes item validation printing compulsory NON COMPULSORY Makes item validation printing non compulsory e You can set an upper limit amount HALO for each department The limit is effective for the REG mode operations and can be overridden in the MGR mode HALO AB is the same as A x 108 A Significant digit for HALO 1 through 9 B Number of zeros to follow the significant digit for HALO 0 through 8 COMPULSORY Makes a scale entry compulsory SCALE ENABLE Enables a scale entry INHIBIT Inhibits a scale entry TARE TABLE Scale table number associated with scale entry 1 through 9 0 VMP No VMP file number for EAN 1 through 3 If the number 0 is entered no VMP file number is assigned TAXABLE1 YES Taxable 1 NO Non taxable 1 YES Taxable 6 TAXABLE6 NO Non taxable 6 GROUP DISCOUNT1 YES Discountable 1 NO Non discountable 1 GROUP DISCOUNT10 YES Discountable 10 NO Non discountable 10 206 PLU EAN ARTICLE gt PLU EAN PGM2 or PGM1 PLU code max 5 digits 1 to 9999
124. IN RA PO NON Does not update a credit totalizer when finalizing a received on account or a paid out entry by a credit key 255 Function selection 2 OPTIONAL FUNCTION SELECT 2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the OPTIONAL button to display the menu and touch the FUNCTION SELECT2 button to program details 3 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 3 satisfactorily 4 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter T LOG FULL Programming whether or not to lock item entry when the TLOG file is full CONTINUE LOCK WHEN E J FULL Programming whether or not to lock item entry when the Electronic Journal file is full CONTINUE LOCK Payment for exchange1 amount PAY FOR EX1 CASH Cash only ALL All media Exchange calculation method EX1 CALC DIVIDE Division MULTI Multiplication CLERK POPUP If a clerk is not sign on under the supervisor clerk CLERK POPUP is displayed ENABLE DISABLE ISBN PRICE Price entry after ISBN ISSN code entry INHIBIT COMPULSORY VMP FULL VMP EAN entry when the VMP file is full ERROR CONTINUE ADD ON FULL Entry of EAN with add on code when the EAN ADD ON file is full ERROR CONTINUE CUSTOMER DATA TOTAL Sales total and charge sales tot
125. ING ENABLE PRICE CHANGE PUBLIC CUSTOMER LEARNING PUBLIC CUSTOMER BILL ENABLE CUSTOMER BILL DEL ENABLE FINALIZE ST 0 PUBLIC 0 RECEIPT DRAWER ENABLE VOID AFTER ST KEY PUBLIC DRAWER OPEN X1 X2 ENABLE DRAWER OPEN 21 22 ENABLE DRAWER OPEN OP 2 ENABLE TERMINAL MACHINE NAME BILL NUMBER 0007 DRAWER ALARM 0 SCREEN SAVE 0 AUTO SIGN OFF 0 LICENSE WARNING 10 SCALE DISPLAY 1 INFO AREA COLOR BLACK SILVER Report type Setting Item Drawer open alarm time Information area color fore color back color 311 Report PGM2 mode 3PGM2 REPORT Report type 0 SKIP Item CLERK SKIP Setting CASHIER SKIP TRANSACTION SKIP DEPARTMENT SKIP PLU SKIP HOURLY NOT SKIP DAILY NET SKIP GENERAL RPT FORMAT DEPARTMENT NOT SKIP TRANSACTION NOT SKIP TAK SALE NOT SKIP NOT SKIP DEPT O TY NOT SKIP DEPT XSHARE NOT SKIP HOURLY REPORT Hourly report MEMORY TYPE 30 START TIME 00 yon REPORT Stacked report 1 01000 PLU STOCK 0001 01000 GENERAL Stacked report 2 0t 02000 000 DEPT GROUP TOTAL EMPLOYEE 0000000001 9999999999 CUSTOMER BY ANT 0 00 499999 99 HOURLY 0700 2000 GLU 1 9999 CUSTONER ORDERING 1000000000000001 2999999999999999 312 Function text PGM2 mode PGH2 FUNCTION TEXT Report type Function text default DI SCOUNT DI SCOUNT Text preset DIFFER DIFFER TAXI ST TAXI ST TAX2 ST TAX2 ST AT 1 VAT 1 VAT 2 VAT 2 V
126. LL VOID Bill void text 162 WASTE WASTE on PLU report 163 COMBO COMBO on PLU report 164 COMBO WASTE COMBO WASTE on PLU report 240 No Default text Classification Note 165 EX1 CHK Check payment for exchange 1 max 12 characters 166 EX1 CREDIT Credit payment for exchange 1 167 DOM CUR1 CHK Domestic currency 1 for check 168 DOM CUR1 CR Domestic currency 1 for credit 169 VOID VOID text on KP 170 REFUND REFUND text on KP 171 RETURN RETURN text on KP 172 NEW CODE New Code for customer 173 CHARGE Remained charge for customer 174 DEDUCTION Deduction 175 PR CHNG Price change receipt title 176 BON PTS Bonus points for item 177 BON PTS AMT Bonus points for total amount 178 BONUS POINTS Total bonus points 179 BON PTS RDM Bonus points redemption 180 REDEMPT TL Total bonus points redemption 181 PARTIAL PAY Parital payment 182 CC TAX1 ST Credit customer taxable 1 ST 183 CC TAX2 ST Credit customer taxable 2 ST 184 CC TAX3 ST Credit customer taxable 3 ST 185 CC TAX4 ST Credit customer taxable 4 ST 186 CC TAX5 ST Credit customer taxable 5 ST 187 CC TAX6 ST Credit customer taxable 6 ST 188 CC VAT 1 Credit customer VAT TAX 1 189 CC VAT2 Credit customer VAT TAX 2 190 CC VAT 3 Credit customer VAT TAX 3 191 CC VAT 4 Credit customer VAT TAX 4 192 CC VAT 5 Credit
127. LU code 1 to 9999 END ROOM GLU Ending ROOM GLU code 1 to 9999 PGM2 MODE DISABLE Disables operation in the PGM2 mode ENABLE Enables operation in the PGM2 mode PGM1 MODE DISABLE Disables operation in the PGM1 mode ENABLE Enables operation in the PGM1 mode PRICE MODE DISABLE Disables operation in the PRICE mode ENABLE Enables operation in the PRICE mode DISABLE Disables operation in the X1 mode X1 MODE DEM ENABLE Enables operation in the X1 mode DISABLE Disables operation in the Z1 mode Z1 MODE ENABLE Enables operation in the Z1 mode X2Z2 MODE DISABLE Disables operation in the X2Z2 mode ENABLE Enables operation in the X2Z2 mode To be continued 244 FLASH MODE DISABLE Disables operation in the FLASH mode ENABLE Enables operation in the FLASH mode AUTO KEY MODE DISABLE Disables operation in the AUTO KEY mode ENABLE Enables operation in the AUTO KEY mode SD CARD MODE DISABLE Disables operation in the SD CARD mode ENABLE Enables operation in the SD CARD mode DISABLE Disables resetting operation in OPXZ mode Z1 IN OPX Z rar ENABLE Enables resetting operation in OPXZ mode RECALL TRANSACTION DISABLE Disables the transaction recall operation ENABLE Enables the transaction recall operation P SFT START Price level range start PRICE 1 through PRICE 8 P SFT END Price level range end PRICE 1 through PRICE 8 NO Disables the happy hour price shift HAPPY HOUR
128. M Ec c Cp RE 287 Backup data send programming SERO ENTERO OAM EN kaa E scare Mis Acree aie DEC TENE 288 Backup data receive programming Eu NE 288 On line configuration programming OEE AN E E AE 289 VMP configuration programming E 290 Dynamic EAN Data Loading cadet e eui eet eere tee tede qu ted cete edd deine do deje mE cede diee wr eie mee aaa Rd act mage 291 Data Clear OTT CEPI E TELE EE EO EET EE ERE EE LEITET CELL C OZE CIE TED 292 PRICE Mode Programming ded en ed See met UE D w a wud conte ox 293 Automatic Sequencing Key Programming Ghats Hao oe rro eo T Ra ron ae 294 Auto menu programming EEEIEE STEET ena Dl tn B Ba TTEA TASTE ES T ETE ke Ble abe be kole n 294 Auto key sequence programming p 294 Reading of Stored Programs mr Eder E XEM ETE CM TET 295 PGM 1 mode Salata waite sse clude ieu vele dace eus dwelt corre sudes sons wale clt se slay peres das zebsEs adr roS Eur deno rena UE MERE 295 PGM 2 mode on die epa ov A kob m dya a kisa jn ase Foli pon 295 Sample Reports of Stored Program Reading E Ca a EA E EE e E aeta ar tene te uon 297 11 Data Saving or Loading SD Card ed Aaa e e diene ke de EE 323 Insertion and Removing an SD Memory Card n n a a n aa a na
129. M2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the VMP CONFIG button to program details 3 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 3 satisfactorily 4 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter PASSWORD Max 4 digits 0 to 9999 VMP1 PASSWORD Max 4 digits 0 to 9999 VMP2 PASSWORD Max 4 digits 0 to 9999 VMP3 PASSWORD Max 4 digits 0 to 9999 VMP1 ID Max 10 digits 0 to 9999999999 VMP2 ID Max 10 digits 0 to 9999999999 VMP3 ID Max 10 digits 0 to 9999999999 290 Dynamic EAN Data Loading This function is used to load the dynamic EAN data to the EAN data file Procedure 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the D EAN LOAD button to perform the loading job The confirmation window ARE YOU SURE is displayed to perform the loading job 2 Select the 1 YES button to perform the loading job Select the 2 NO button to cancel the loading job 291 Data Clear The DATA CLEAR is chiefly used for clearing data in the event some system trouble occurred Use the following procedure to perform the data clear operation only when instructed by your authorized SHARP dealer Procedure 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the DATA CLEAR button to perform the data clear job The data file list is displayed to clear 2 Select the data file from the list to cl
130. ME gt SCREEN n or screen no entry Mode screen j MODE EXIT REG mode screen Home Payment key screen 19 H Function key list using default key labels Classification Description Function TEN KEY 0 through 9 Used to enter a numeric data 0 through 9 00 Used to enter a numeric data 00 000 Used to enter a numeric data 000 Decimal point key XIQTY Multiplication key SYSTEM HOME Used to return to HOME keyboard screen CANCEL or EXIT Used to cancel your current operation CLEAR Used to clear the entered data and the error messages MODE Used to go to MODE selection window 4 Up Used to control the cursor up arrow v Down Used to control the cursor down arrow lt Left Used to change the keyboard gt Right Used to change the keyboard ENTER Used to accept entered data PAGE_UP Used to scroll page up PAGE_DOWN Used to scroll page down BACK_SPACE Used to backs up the cursor for deleting the character or figure at the left of the cursor DELETE Used to delete a character or figure in the cursor position SCREEN SCREEN SCREENS through SCREEN 30 Go to SCREEN n n 3 30 SCREEN Used to enter the screen number BACK Back to the previous screen FUNCTIO
131. N KEY DEVICE CONFIG JOURNAL PRINTER RECEIPT REPORT PRINTER BILL PRINTER KP 1 KP 9 BCR SCANNER SCALE ONLINE POLE DISPLAY 198 TAX CUSTOMER CUSTOMER CUSTOMER PROG ORDER MASK BRANCHES TRANSFER MASK BACKUP SEND BACKUP RECEIVE ONLINE CONFIG INLINE CONFIG MWS CONFIG VMP CONFIG D EAN LOAD DATA CLEAR E JOURNAL T LOG TRANSACTION CLERK CASHIER HOURLY DAILY NET SIGN ON FLAG GLU USED FLAG INITIAL D L MAINTENANCE D L DECLARE amp RECOVERY MA BMA 199 How to Program Alphanumeric Characters When you program alphanumeric characters the character keyboard will be displayed as shown below EXTO1 UL INS SPACE OK TEXT START SHIFT LIST SHIFT TEXTCOPY PASTE TEXT_START TEXT_END CANCEL OK NORMAL DOUBLE INS DELETE BACK_SPACE lt gt v 4 SHIFT LIST CAPS ENTER 200 m Ea F C Used to copy the text data Used to paste the text data Used to skip to the start of a text Used to skip to the end of a text Used to cancel programming and to get back to the previous screen Used to finalize programming Used to change the normal size or double size Used to switch the insert over
132. N MENU FUNC_MENU01 through FUNC_MENU30 Used to display the function menu nn nn 01 through 30 AUTO MENU AUTO_MENU1 through AUTO_MENU6 Used to display the auto key menu nn nn 1 through 6 PAY Used to display the payment screen LEVEL LEVEL1 through LEVEL10 Used to shift the direct PLU key level level 1 through 10 LEVEL Used to enter the direct PLU key level number PRICE PRICE SHIFT1 through PRICE SHIFT8 Used to shift the price level level 1 through 8 Continued 20 PRICE SHIFT Used to enter the price level shift number Classification Description Function PLU MENU PLU MENUJO 1 through PLU MENUS50 Used to display the PLU menu nn nn 01 through 50 PLU EAN Specified item PLU EAN number DEPT Used to enter the department number SCALE Scale entry OPEN _TARE Scale entry tare weight entry WITH Add tied PLU for combo set PLU WITHOUT Delete tied PLU from combo set PLU C NEXT Used to skip the next table of condiments INQ PLU price inquiry PRICE_CHANGE Change the price of PLU AMOUNT Used to enter the amouint HALF_PINT Used to perform the half pint entry CRATE CRATEnn Used to perform the crate nn entry nn 01 through 99 CRATE Used to enter the crate number nn nn 01 through 99 ITF Used
133. NFIG MWS CONFIG VMP CONFIG ROM VERSION 296 Sample Reports of Stored Program Reading H Department PGM1 or PGM2 mode Operating mode Report type Dept code Description PGM2 L DEPARTMENT Do 5 23 1123456 G01 LIG 3 61 DPT O2 G01 1001003 00000000000 YO CO DPT O2 118 BLACK BLUE D03 8 42 DPT 03 G02 1001003 00000000000 vo CO 0 01 L18 BLACK BLUE ae n e e te yo Tc MC C A 2 51 DPT 19 616 1000003 00000000000 YO CO DPT 19 KPOO1 L18 BLACK BLUE D20 60 FT 20 617 1000003 00000000000 YO 0 DPT 20 KPOO1 118 BLACK BLUE Group discount 1 to 9 Yes no Tax status taxable1 taxable6 Unit price Group no Commission group HALO limit Print station Remote printer 1 2 receipt Function programming 1001003 Amount entry type open and preset preset open inhibited Receipt type double single SIF SICS normal Scale status Scale compulsory enable inhibited Scale table no Item validation print compulsory non compulsory Print on clerk report Yes no When you take this report in the PGM1 mode the PGM2 indication in replaced by PGM1 297 H PLU EAN PGM1 or PGM2 mode PGM2 Associated dept code Report type PLU EAN ead CHE PLU L link PLU table Tax
134. NTER key at the last line e To void an incorrect entry select the money type and enter correct quantities and touch the ENTER key e To print the SCM data touch the CONTINUE key To cancel the SCM function touch the CANCEL key 28 Item Entries Registration screen Han direct PEU key 1x2 10 00002 108 50 PLUOOOO1 cLKO2 CLKO3 EI ap SA 01 1000 16 08 15 Receipt window The registration screen can be changed to another registration screen by using the SCREEN key or screen entries Screen no SCREENH H Single item entries e Department entries Enter a unit price and touch a department key If you use a programmed unit price touch a department key only Procedure For using a programmed unit price Department key Department code 1 99 gt DEPT For entering a unit price Unit price max 8 digits Department key unit price within the programmed HALO Unit price gt AMOUNT gt Department code 1 99 DEPT Key Operation Display 1200 Department 6 0001 Department 7 2 DEPT 13 20 3 20 600 AMOUNT 5 DEPT DPT O2 CASH TOTAL 1x6 00 6 00 0 05 CASH 26 20 26 20 29 e Direct PLU entries For preset only type Direct PLU key For
135. NTER key in the following window 117 e Break in 1 Touch the BREAK key The following window is displayed to enter the employee code 2 Enter the employee code max 10 digits and touch the ENTER key or read the employee card 3 If the secret code is requested enter the secret code and touch the ENTER key in the following window ENTER SECRET CODE e Break out 1 Touch the BREAK key The following window is displayed to enter the employee code 2 Enter the employee code max 10 digits and touch the ENTER key or read the employee 3 If the secret code is requested enter the secret code and touch the ENTER key in the following window ENTER SECRET CODE 4 If the job location entry is requested select the job location in the following window SELECT LOCATION LOCATION1 LOCATION2 118 e Time edit operations A manager can edit employee s time in out data to record his or her time correctly Procedure 1 Select the OPXZ mode and touch the EMPLOYEE menu then touch the TIME EDIT job The following window is displayed TIME EDIT 2 Enter the manager code and secret code then touch the ENTER key or the CONTINUE key The following window is displayed to enter the employee code BACK SPACE 10 01 2008 TIME EDIT 3 Enter the employee code and touch the ENTER key or read the employee card If you want to select the employee f
136. OINT REDEMP LEA aa ADD 7 Panrra Enn rense meta same 7 OK BON PIS ROM 10 1 00 CASH TOTAL CASH 2 20 122 WASTE Mode This mode is used to throw away an article which has already been prepared and is no longer serviceable Procedure WASTE Item registration WASTE eS WASTE mode e PLU entries are only allowed in the WASTE mode and direct and indirect void operations are also allowed in this mode e When a WASTE mode transaction is finalized the drawer does not open e The consecutive number is incremented every WASTE mode transaction e When the WASTE mode is activated by touching the WASTE key the mode caption WASTE is displayed Example Key Operation Print WASTE WAS PLU 00002 1 1 00 E 1 00 PLU 00003 PLUOO002 MASTE 1 1 00 1 00 PLUO0003 123 TRAINING Mode The training mode is used when the operator or the manager practices POS terminal operations In case clerk and cashier system is applied to your POS terminal cashiers can enter to the training mode When a clerk cashier set in training is selected the POS terminal automatically enters the training mode while a clerk cashier not set in training is selected the POS terminal automatically enters the ordinary REG mode A training text and a maximum of two training clerks cashiers can be programmed The training operations are valid in all modes A mark which is identifying a training
137. POS terminal Please keep this manual for future reference IMPORTANT e Install this terminal in a location that is not subject to direct radiation unusual temperature changes and high humidity or exposure to water or other liquids Installation in such locations could cause damage to the cabinet and the electronic components e Do not drop this terminal nor subject it to any strong shock This may cause damage to the terminal e Do not apply excessive pressure to the display Do not use a sharp pointed object on the display This may cause damage to the LCD display e When cleaning this terminal use a dry soft cloth Never use solvents such as benzine or thinner The use of such chemicals will lead to discoloration or deterioration of the cabinet e The terminal plugs into any standard wall outlet official nominal voltage Other electrical devices on the same electrical circuit could cause the terminal to malfunction e If the terminal malfunctions call your local authorized dealer for service Do not try to repair the terminal yourself e Be sure to use the supplied AC adapter and AC power cord Otherwise an electric shock or fire may be caused e For a complete electrical disconnection remove the AC power cord from the wall outlet PRECAUTION This POS terminal has a built in memory protection circuit which is operated by a rechargeable battery pack Please note that all batteries will in time dissipate their charge
138. REIGN CURRENCY button to display the currency exchange menu list 3 Touch the FOREIGN DRWA button to program details 4 Touch the required programming item and touch the ENTER key 5 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter DRAWER 1 FOREIGN DRW DRAWER2 NONE 234 Currency money MEDIA gt CURRENCY MONEY 2 You can program the texts and amounts of each domestic bill coin foreign currency used for the starting cash memory Up to 20 currencies MOENY1 through 20 can be programmed 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the MEDIA button to display the menu and touch the CURRENCY MONEY button to display the currency money list MONEY1 through MONEY20 3 Select the currency money to program details 4 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 4 satisfactorily 5 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter TEXT Description for the currency money Up to 12 characters can be entered AMOUNT Amount for the currency money max 6 digits The default data is the followings Classification Default text Default amount MONEY1 1 CENT 0 01 MONEY2 2 CENT 0 02 MONEY3 5 CENT 0 05 MONEY4 10 CENT 0 10 MONEY5 20 CENT 0 2
139. RO JOB X2 Z2 mode after the preset date When the EURO STATUS of your POS terminal is already D i e the domestic currency has been changed to EURO in your POS terminal this programming is disabled TIME PRICE CONVERT 259 Zero skip REPORT gt 0 SKIP 2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the REPORT button to display the menu and touch the 0 SKIP button to program details 3 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 3 satisfactorily 4 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter CLERK SKIP Skips those data that are 0 in the clerk report NOT SKIP Does not skip those data that are 0 in the clerk CASHIER SKIP Skips those data that are 0 in the cashier report NOT SKIP Does not skip those data that are 0 in the cashier report TRANSACTION SKIP Skips those data that are 0 in the transaction report NOT SKIP Does not skip those data that are 0 in the transaction report SKIP Skips those data that are 0 in the department report DEPARTMENT NOT SKIP Does not skip those data that are 0 in the department report PLU SKIP Skips those data that are 0 in the PLU EAN report NOT SKIP Does not skip those data that are 0 in the PLU EAN report HOURLY SKIP S
140. Read symbol DEPT GROUP Report title e Sample Z report uos Reset symbol GENERAL 71 0001 7 Reset counter of daily total GENERAL 22 0 01 of periodic GT1 00000035794 04 1 n GT2 00000041335 46 GT3 00000005541 42 Grand tol ls BAL 00000000204 00 TR 00000000004 00 DEPT GROUP Report title The subsequent items are printed out in the same format as in the X Z report on daily totals 182 Employee report D 2 EMPLOYEE 0000000001 0000000010 0000000001 DAVID 22 10 200 TIME IN 8 45 01 LOCATIONS BREAK IN 11 45 007 12 30 03 LOCATIONHS BREAK IN 14 30 BREAK QUT 15 30 802 LOCATIONS2 TIME OUT LOC O1 LOCATION 1 BREAK TL 0 45H TOTAL 3 00H L COST 3 60 102402 LOCATION 2 BREAK T 0 00H HT OTAL 1 30H L COST 3 60 0803 LOCATIONK3 BREAK TL 1 00H eT OTAL 2 00H L COST 7 20 BREAK TL 1 45H TTL HOUR 30H OVR TIME 8 308 TTL COST 14 40 80000000002 EDWARD M 22 10 2008 TIME IN 8 47 02 LOCATION 2 TIME OUT 100402 LOCATION 2 BREAK TL 0 00H 6 14H L COST 14 96 BREAK TL 0 00H TTL HOUR 6 14H OVR TIME 6 14H TTL COST 14 96 When you take a Z report Z2 is printed instead of X2 Employee code Range Employee name Date Time in Job location no Job location name Break
141. SH TOTAL 7 06 3 000kg x 1 00 Ag 3 00 CASH 16 00 16 00 e Manual scale item entry Net weight SCALE Single item entry e Gross weight Up to 5 digits integer decimal e The net weight is automatically calculated using the programmed tare weight e The currency descriptor is displayed printed when it is programmed for the CHECK Key Operation Display 3 SCALE 1 PLU_EAN TN CASH TOTAL 340g 1 00 Ag 3 00 PLUOOOOL CASH 3 00 3 00 Single item cash sale SICS single item finalize SIF entries The operation is the same as that for normal department PLU EAN entries The SICS and SIF functions can be available only when the KP receipt type is addition receipt type e SICS entries e This function is useful when a sale is for only one item and is for cash such as a pack of cigarettes This function is applicable only to those departments that have been set for SICS or to their associated PLUs or EANs e The transaction is finalized and the drawer opens as soon as you touch the department key DEPT key PLU_EAN key or the direct PLU key If an entry to a department PLU or EAN set for SICS follows the ones to departments PLUs or EANs not set for SICS it does not finalize and results in a normal sale Example Key Operation Display 350 For finishing the transaction Department 9 103 50 3 50 09 CASH 3 50 3 50 40 e
142. SHARP CAUTION Please observe the following when an optional drawer is used The drawer unit should be securely fitted to the supporting platform to avoid instability when the drawers are open CAUTION The socket outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible VORSICHT Die Netzsteckdose mu nahe dem Ger t angebracht und leicht zug nglich sein ATTENTION La prise de courant murale devra tre install e a proximit de l quipement et devra tre facilement accessible AVISO El tomacorriente debe estar instalado cerca del equipo y debe quedar bien accesible VARNING Det matande v gguttaget skall placeras nara apparaten och vara l tt atkomligt LET OP Het stopcontact dient in de buurt van de kassa en gemakkelijk toegangbaar te zijn CAUTION For a complete electrical disconnection pull out the mains plug VORSICHT Zur vollst ndigen elektrischen Trennung vom Netz den Netzstecker ziehen ATTENTION Pour obtenir une mise hors circuit totale d brancher la prise de courant secteur AVISO Para una desconexi n el ctrica completa desenchufar el enchufe de tomacorriente VARNING F r att helt koppla fr n str mmen dra ut stickproppen LET OP Trek de stekker uit het stopcontact indien u de stroom geheel wilt uitschakelen INTRODUCTION Thank you very much for your purchase of the SHARP POS Terminal Model UP 3515 Please read this manual carefully before operating your
143. S_8 VAT ID 12 04 x0 00 CHARGE 0 00 SUBTOTAL 80 s220 71 CHARGE x197 41 TOTAL 190 272 91 CHARGE 168 41 When you select DELETE Z2 is printed instead of X2 H Customer delete report 22 CUSTOMER DELETE 0900000001122 0900000002233 Customer range 0900000001 122 Customer code 7 Name ADDRESS 7 Address VAT IDR11 VAT ID 04 0 00 CHARGE 0 00 0900000002233 NAME ADDRESS_8 VAT IDR12 0 00 CHARGE 0 00 SUBTOTAL 04 0 00 CHARGE 0 00 KXTOTAL 180 272 91 CHARGE 168 41 190 Non accessed EAN and Customer Deletion You can delete EANs and customers that had not been accessed for a certain period You can program a period in the PGM2 mode As for customer you can also delete customers with regardless to a non accessed period Follow the procedure shown below e Non accessed EAN deletion 1 Select the X1 Z1 mode 2 Select NON ACCESSED EAN 3 To take a reading report select READING To delete non accessed EANS select DELETE The selection window ALL DELETE IND DELETE is displayed To delete all the non accessed select ALL DELETE To delete the non accessed EANS individually select IND DELETE 4 To terminate the operation touch the EXIT button It is recommended to take a report first before executing deleting operation e Non accessed customer deletion 1 Select the X2 Z2 mode 2 Select
144. T When the POS terminal has been programmed for the automatic return mode by one item Level 1 key gt Level 2 key gt Level 1 key gt Key Operation PLU 00001 LEVEL2 PLU 00051 PLU 00002 CASH TOTAL EZI When the POS terminal has been programmed for the lock shift mode Level 1 key gt Level 2 key gt Level 2 key gt Key Operation LEVEL 1 PLU 00001 LEVEL2 PLU 00051 PLU 00052 CASH TOTAL Display 0001 PLUOOOO1 1x2 10 2 10 PLUOOOD1 1x1 00 1 00 PLU00002 CASH 4 10 sxx TOTAL 4 10 Display 0001 PLUOOOO1 1x2 10 2 10 PLUOOOD1 1x3 20 3 20 PLUOOOS2 CASH 6 30 6 30 53 H Price level shift Eight different price levels can be programmed for each PLU EAN The price levels can be changed for PLU EAN registrations You can shift the PLU EAN price level level 1 through 8 by utilizing the price level shift number key PRICE SHIFTA or the price shift keys PRICE SHIFT1 through PRICE SHIFTS You must program a price level shift mode i e automatic return mode or lock shift mode and the operating modes to be used for the price level shift i e both REG and MGR modes or MGR mode alone The automatic return mode automatically shifts the PLU EAN price level back to level 1 after a PLU EAN shift entry You can select whether the price level should return each time you enter one item or each time you finalize one transaction The lock shif
145. TING to perform the programming 2 Touch the ARTICLE button to display the menu and touch the PLU MENU KEY button to display the menu key list 3 Select the PLU menu key or enter the PLU menu key number the operation list KEY STYLE PRESET KEY CONTENT PRESET window is displayed Select the operation 4 When the KEY STYLE PRESET operation is selected the following data can be programmed Text Parameter TEXT max 16 digits characters space 2x2 2x2 size key VERTICAL DOUBLE Vertical double size key REY SEE HORIZONTAL DOUBLE Horizontal double size key SINGLE Single size key SCREEN NO Screen no max 2 digits 1 to 30 0 After menu entry operation AFTER MENU ENTRY STAY Stay the current screen RETURN Return to the HOME Touch the corresponding item and select or enter programming data 4 When the KEY CONTENT PRESET operation is selected the content list window is displayed Select a key The content programming window will be displayed Touch the LIST key and select one of the items PLU MENU INHIBIT Then touch the CONTINUE button and enter the PLU code or menu code 5 To finish the programming touch the EXIT key 211 Combo meal table ARTICLE gt COMBO MEAL PGM2 Table number max 2 digits 1 to 99 Tied PLU max 10 PLUs 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the ARTICLE butt
146. TL 32 74 NON CON 15879 14 PAID TL 16389 15 AVE 70 64 0 79 70 TLI 111 92 TL2 9 79 TL3 10 93 VIPI SALE 49 90 VIP2 SALE 20 20 VIP3 SALE 25 40 TRAN OUT 5 15 0 TRAN IN Q x22 10 BILL BAL Q 24 80 REFUND Q 41 65 VD 10 5338 30 VOI Q x38 00 HGR VD 0 38 00 SBTL VO 0 15 90 WASTE TL 800 31450 RETURN Q 15 40 0 NO SALE Q G C CNT GUEST Q e e When you take a Z report Z1 is printed instead of X1 Clerk code Clerk name Order total Commission sale 1 total Commission amount 1 Commission amount total Non commission sales amount Paid total Paid total average per guest Order total paid total Non turnover 1 total Vip 1 sale Vip 2 sale Vip 3 sale Trans out counter and total Trans in counter and total Bill balance Trans out trans in Refund counter and total Item void mode transaction counter and total Void mode transaction counter and total Manager item void counter and total Subtotal item void counter and total Waste mode transaction Return counter and total PBAL counter No sale counter Guest check copy counter Guest counter Deposit counter and total DEPOSIT 10 50 00 DEPO 10 10 00 50 66 26 20 x12 94 9 20 0 75 20 1 05 44 12 00 ipo 20 6 10 SCH 1 2513 80 SCM
147. TY 5 X QTY 860 PLU 00001 2 3004 300x1 00 11 25 2 5 X QTY 4 5 X QTY 1 PLU PLUDOOO1 4 XIQTY 1 5 X QTY 4901780438532 EAN 4x1 500x8 70 52 20 CASH_TOTAL 01 CASH 284 45 284 45 38 H Scale entries This function is used to sell items by weight There are two types of weight entry systems available auto scale entries and manual scale entries Auto scale entry is used when the weight is read automatically from the connected scale option In the case of manual scale entry the weight is entered by using the ten key pad function e Auto scale entries Procedure Open tare weight entry OPEN_TARE Tare weight SCALE gt Single item entry Tare table number entry Tare table number SCALE Single item entry e Open tare weight Up to 5 digits integer decimal e Scale table number 1 to 9 e Net weight Up to 5 digits integer decimal e When you use a programmed tare table number skip the tare table no entry Tare table number e When the item is programmed for compulsory scale entry it is not necessary to touch the SCALE key e To issue a receipt which shows only a tare weight Issuing the Tare receipt OPEN_TARE Tare weight gt SCALE CASH TOTAL e The currency descriptor is displayed printed when it is programmed for the CHECK Key Operation Display 2 SCALE 650 Department 6 3 SCALE 1 PLU_EAN ba pu CA
148. U GLU report Starting GLU code ending GLU code 1 to 9999 28 BALANCE Balance report 29 BILL Bill report 30 CUSTOMER SALES1 Starting customer code ending customer code P 1 to 9999999999999 31 CUSTOMER SALES2 searen Starting customer code ending customer code P P 1 to 9999999999999 32 CUSTOMER BY AMT Customer sales report by amount Starting price ending price 0 through 99999 99 33 CHARGE ACCOUNT Charge account report 34 NON ACCESSED EAN Non accessed EAN report 35 NON ACCESSED CUST Non accessed customer report 36 CUSTOMER uttter Starting customer ordering code ending customer ORDERING1 ordering code 10000000 to 29999999 37 CUSTOMER ele e Ind Starting customer ordering code ending customer ORDERING2 ngrep ordering code 10000000 to 29999999 Starting ROOM GLU code ending ROOM GLU 38 ROOM GLU ROOM GLU report code 1 to 9999 271 Receipt logo MESSAGE gt RECEIPT LOGO PGM2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the MESSAGE button to display the menu and touch the RECEIPT LOGO button to program details 3 Enter the logo text and touch the OK key Repeat this step 3 satisfactorily 4 To terminate the programming touch the CANCEL or EXIT key Text Parameter Receipt logo text max 30 characters X 6 lines lt Default data gt SHARP Receipt logo PRESENTS THE
149. U K FRENCH SWEDEN GERMAN TYPE2 SCALE TABLE PLU EAN STOCK OVER WRITE ADD SUBTRACT EAN DELETE 196 DIRECT KEY FUNCTIONS GROUP DISCOUNT COMMISSION MISC FUNCTIONS DEPOSIT DEPO ke RA ke RAZ DO 2 NON CASH CID CHK CG SERVICE CHARGE BONUS POINT BONUS POINT TABLE BONUS REDEMPTION MEDIA CASH CHECK CREDIT HOTEL TRANSFER CA CHK CUSTOMER CHARGE FOREIGN CURRENCY CURRENCY MONEY TAINING TEXT CLK TEXT FUNCTION TEXT DEPT GROUP PLU GROUP PLU HOURLY GROUP PLU INFORMATION PERSONNEL CLERK CASHIER MANAGER EMPLOYEE JOB LOCATE TABLE WORKING TIME SHIFT CONTACTLESS KEY CLERK KEY DEL 197 TERMINAL DATE TIME OPTIONAL FUNCTION PROHIBIT FUNCTION SELECT1 FUNCTION SELECT2 PRINT SELECT1 PRINT SELECT2 DISPLAY SELECT EURO REPORT 0 SKIP GENERAL RPT FORMAT TRANS RPT FORMAT CLERK RPT FORMAT HOURLY REPORT DEPT RPT FORMAT STACKED REPORT REPORT 1 REPORT 2 MESSAGE RECEIPT LOGO FREE TEXT VP TEXT BILL TEXT BILL FOOTER PAYEE NAME E BILL MESSAGE SCROLL POLE DISP SCROLL MAIN DISP FUNCTION KEY FUNCTION MENU KEY FUNCTIO
150. U entry in case the clerk system or the clerk cashier system is selected e The GLU code refers to a code that will be used whenever the guest check must be accessed for re ordering or final payment e Your POS terminal can be programmed GLU codes in a sequential fashion automatic GLU code generation If your POS terminal has not been programmed to do so each GLU code can be entered manually 1 The guest number refers to the number of people in the party When the cover count entry is compulsory enter the guest number max 2 digits and touch the ENTER key When it is non compulsory enter the guest number and touch the GUESTIt key To correct the number of guests re enter a number and touch the 6UEST key 2 This is the optional function Temporary finalization You can temporarily finalize a guest check by touching the NBAL or FINAL key It is recommended to use the NBAL key to temporarily finalize a guest check when printing is not desired and to use the FINAL key when printing the current balance including tax is desired The guest check however is still open This means you can still make additional orders to it 8 The tax is calculated and is added to the tax totalizer 4 In case the copy receipt function is enabled G C RCPT and SLIP key operations can be repeated only once Validation printing operation can be repeated once by default You can set the number of VP operations between 0 to 9 68
151. UBTOTAL Used to display subtotals DIFFER ST Used to calculate the difference subtotal REMOVE SERV CHG Service charge exemption key PERSONNEL CLK Clerk number entering CLERK CLKnn Clerk nn 01 10 CSR Casier number entering CASHIER CSRn Cashier n 1 10 MGR Manager number entering EMPL Employee number entering TIME_IN Used to enter time in operation TIME_OUT Used to enter time out operation BREAK Used to enter break in out operation WORK_CHANGE Used to specify working time shift change OPENED_GLU Go to opened GLU list screen OPENED_ROOM Go to opened ROOM GLU list screen GLU Used to lookup the guest check ROOM Used to enter the ROOM GLU NBAL Used to finalize the guest check temporarily FINAL Used to finalize the guest check temporarily with the tax calculation DEPOSIT Used to enter the deposit Continued 22 DEPOSIT_REFUND Used to refund the deposit Classification Description Function GUEST Used to enter the guest number RECALL_TRANS Used to re call the corresponding transaction INTER_MED Intermediate GLU key B T Bill totalizing B S _ITEM Bill separation by items B S AMOUNT Bill separation by amount B S _PERSON Bill separate by person B S _RETURN
152. Used to return B S mode TRANS_OUT Used to enter the transfer out function TRANS_IN Used to enter the transfer in function PRINTING RCPT Used to print the receipt after transaction RCPT_ON OFF Used to switch the receipt printing state ON OFF CUST_BILL Customer bill printing C BILL Used to enter the cumulated bill E BILL Entertainment bill printing G C RCPT Bill on receipt RCPT_SHIFT Receipt shift change print type SORT_SHIFT Temporary change sort group VP Validation printing BILL Used to print the bill CHECK PRINT Check printing CUSTOMER CUSTOMER Used for customer management CUST CHARGE Customer charge key NAME amp ADD Used to enter name address data ADVANCE ORDER Advance order key customer ordering CREDIT ORDER Credit order key customer ordering CORRECT ORDER Correct order key customer ordering AUTO AUTO Auto key AUTOn Auto key n 2 99 VIP VIP SALE n VIP sales n 1 3 POINT REDEMP Point redemption key MASK Mask key BANK CONSOLE Bank console key E MAIL E mail key 23 How to Use the Touch Panel Operations can be performed by touching corresponding key s and or selecting option s or Item s in the window Do not use extreme force when touching the display Do not use any
153. X QTY 4901780438532 PLU_EAN 01 CASH_TOTAL CASH 24 12 24 12 36 Successive multiplication entries This function is practical for example when you enter a sale of items sold by area Square meter e Department entries Procedure For using a programmed unit price Length X QTY Width X QTY Department key Length gt X QTY Width X QTY Dept code DEPT For entering a unit price Length gt X QTY gt Width gt X QTY gt Unit price gt Department key Length gt X QTY gt Width X QTY gt Unit price AMOUNT Deprt code DEPT e Length or width Up to 4 digits integer 3 digits decimal e Unit price per m Less than a programmed upper limit e Length x Width x Unit price up to 8 digits e Direct PLU entries Procedure For preset only type Length X QTY Width X QTY gt Direct PLU key For open only type Length X QTY Width X QTY Unit price Direct PLU key For open and preset type open price entry Length gt X QTY Width X QTY Unit price Direct PLU key For open and preset type preset price entry Length X QTY Width X QTY Direct PLU key e Length or width Up to 4 digits integer 3 digits decimal e Unit price per m Less than a programmed upper limit e Length x Width x Unit price
154. YES Enables the happy hour price shift CUST BILL PRINT DISABLE Disables customer bill printing ENABLE Enables customer bill printing CUST BILL DELETE DISABLE Disables customer bill deletion ENABLE Enables customer bill deletion AUTO MENU1 DISABLE Disables each AUTO menu 1 key ENABLE Enables each AUTO menu 1 key AUTO MENU2 DISABLE Disables each AUTO menu 2 key ENABLE Enables each AUTO menu 2 key AUTO MENUS DISABLE Disables each AUTO menu 6 key ENABLE Enables each AUTO menu 6 key SCREEN LIMITATION Screen limitation Screen no max 2 digits 2 to 30 To select no limitation set the screen no 0 245 Cashier PERSONNEL gt CASHIER PGM2 or PGM1 1 Select the PGM1 or PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the PERSONNEL button to display the menu and touch the CASHIER button to display the cashier list 3 Touch or select the cashier and touch the ENTER key to program details 4 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 4 satisfactorily 5 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter SECRET CODE Secret code max 4 digits 0001 to 9999 0000 NAME Name for the cashier Up to 12 characters can be entered CLERKxxxx Key number 0 through 255 KEY No The entry
155. ZE NORMAL Prints the normal size letters on the journal SMALL Prints the compressed size letters on the journal VAT TAX AMT ON R J NO Does not print VAT or tax amounts on the receipt and journal YES Prints VAT or tax amounts on the receipt and journal TAXABLE AMT ON R J NO Does not print taxable amounts on the receipt and journal YES Prints taxable amounts on the receipt and journal NET AMOUNT ON R J NO Does not print net amounts on the receipt and journal YES Prints net amounts on the receipt and journal VAT TAX AMT BILL NO Does not print VAT or tax amounts on the bill YES Prints VAT or tax amounts on the bill TAXABLE AMT BILL NO Does not print taxable amounts on the bill YES Prints taxable amounts on the bill NET AMOUNT ON BILL NO Does not print net amounts on the bill YES Prints net amounts on the bill TIME PRINT ON BILL NO Does not print the time on the bill YES Prints the time on the bill TABLE PRINT BILL NO Does not print the table number on the bill YES Prints the table number on the bill ROOM PRINT BILL NO Does not print the room number on the bill YES Prints the room number on the bill BILL PRINT ON SLIP NO Does not print the bill on the slip YES Prints the bill on the slip BILL PRINT ON RCPT NO Does not print the bill on the receipt YES Prints the bill on the receipt INTERMEDIATE SLIP NO Does no
156. advance ordering Perform this function to register a customer advance order An ordering number is assigned to each customer advance order Every time a new customer advance order is registered an incremented ordering number is assigned to the order If the order is finalized or canceled the once assigned ordering number will never be used again e New ordering Procedure 1 Touch the ADVANCE_ORDER key the following window is displayed 2 Touch the NEW key the following window is displayed To cancel the operation touch the CANCEL key DELIVERY INFO 3 Enter each item DATE TIME and touch the ENTER key 4 Perform the sales registration entry New advanced orders must be temporarily closed with the NBAL or FINAL key When the purchase order date comes finalize them by cash check or credit tendering 88 e Additional ordering Procedure 1 Enter the ordering no gt ADVANCE ORDER The order record is appeared Skip to the next step 2 If the order record is selected from the list touch the ADVANCE_ORDER key without a ordering no to display the list Then select the order record and touch the ENTER key to display the record To cancel the operation touch the CANCEL key 2 Perform the sales registration entry To correct the DATE TIME touch the CORRECT_ORDER key The confirmation window YES NO is displayed Then select YES The following display is disp
157. aintenance OPERATION 4 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 4 satisfactorily For the programming items refer to the following tables same as dynamic EAN 5 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Dynamic EAN ARTICLE gt DYNAMIC PGM2 or PGM1 UPC EAN code max 13 digits EAN13 EAN8 UPC A 1 Select the PGM1 or PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the ARTICLE button to display the menu and touch the DYNAMIC EAN button to display the dynamic EAN 3 Touch or enter the dynamic EAN number and touch the ENTER key to program the each dynamic EAN 4 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 4 satisfactorily 5 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key 207 Text Parameter Department code to be associated with the entered PLU EAN 01 through 99 When a PLU EAN is associated with a department the following functions of the PLU EAN depend on the programming for the department DEPT CODE Grouping group through 17 e Item validation print compulsory non compulsory e Single item cash sale Single item finalize e Single receipt double receipt HALO only for subdepartments Plus PLU EAN Minus PLU EAN The function of every PLU EAN va
158. al Charge account Date Sales items Charge total 0800000000075 2 ADDR VAT IDA3 3 00 CHARGE 29 00 10 01 2008 11 57 lx 1 00 00 x 1 PLUOQO03 10 01 2008 12 07 RA CHARGE 29 00 0800000001232 NAME 5 5 VAT IDR4 Q 1 00 CHARGE 0 00 10 01 2008 12 00 x 1 1 00 PLUOO03 CHARGE 0 00 3esTOTAL 15 0 226 91 The full total on the customer file CHARGE 168 41 Customer sales report by specified sales range x2 CUSTOMER BY AHT 0 01 9999999 99 Sales range 00000001 10001 Customer code Customer 110001 Name ADDRESS 1 Address VAT IDR1 VAT ID 81 220 71 Sales q ty and total CHARGE 197 41 Charge account 28 01 2008 Date 00002 1 000 0 Sales items PLUOO002 2 10 00003 1 000 Q PLUOO003 x5 30 00008 1 000 Q PLUOOOOB 6 50 00009 1 000 0 PLUO0009 2 90 DEN 187 c e 5 0800000001232 NANE_5 ADDR 5 VAT IDRM 10 1 00 CHARGE 0 00 10 01 2008 00003 1 000 Q PLUO0003 1 00 SUBTOTAL 150 226 9 CHARGE 168 41 TOTAL 150 26 91 CHARGE 168 41 Subtotal on the report The full total on the customer file Customer charge account report KX 2 CHARGE ACCOUNT 0000000110001 Customer code Customer 110001 Name Address ADDRESS 1 VAT ID VAT IDR1 CHARGE 197 41 SUBTOTAL CHARGE 197 41 ATOTAL CHARG
159. al DETAIL Detail data Sales total charge sales total sales date item s name amount and quantity ROOM TRANS DATA TOTAL Sales total DETAIL Detail data EURO NON PLU Converting the unit price of EAN NON PLU codes suffix code 21 22 23 27 between EURO and the local currency CONVERT NO CONVERT EURO ALL CONVERT Converting the unit price of EAN NON PLU codes all types of codes between EURO and the local currency CONVERT NO CONVERT 256 Printing selection 1 OPTIONAL gt PRINT SELECTI PGM2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the OPTIONAL button to display the menu and touch the PRINT SELECT1 button to program details 3 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 3 satisfactorily 4 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter PURCHASE NO NO Does not print the number of purchases YES Prints the number of purchases TIME PRINT NO Does not print the time on the receipt and journal YES Prints the time on the receipt and journal JOURNAL SELECTIVE PARTIAL Prints the information on all entries other than normal department entries entries into departments and their associated PLUs on the journal FULL Prints the detailed information on the journal JOURNAL TEXT SI
160. are printed in the sequence shown below 146 Daily Report Samples General report e Sample X report IRT m Read symbol Report title r Dept code DEPT GROUP DOT 985 2300 95 525 DPT O 1 0600 4 Sales q ty Ratio of dept 1 sales amount to dept total Dept description and sales amount Guest counter Item deduction q ty Item deduction amount Group 1 total q ty Ratio of dept group 1 sales amount to dept total Group 1 total amount Group 1 text Group 1 item deduction amount GUEST Q DOZ 6 000 0 3 DPT 02 1 94 GUEST DEDUCTION 10 0 40 GROUPI 991 230 0 95 84 8612 41 DEDUCTION 9 305 DOS 5000 0 60 DPT O3 2 71 GUEST 40 DEDUCTION 10 0 25 DO4 5000 0 4 27 04 418 23 GUEST 30 DEDUCTION 10 0 60 GRUP 11 0000 1 0 41 00 DEDUCTION 24 0 85 ee ee s a 2222222 TL 1030 230 Q 100 004 3169 23 DEDUCTION 19 Q 8 D13 6 000 0 DPT 13 15 60 GUEST 4 DEPT 6 000 0 15 60 p oe CX Group 1 item deduction q ty dept sales q ty and total 4 dept deduction q ty and total gt dept counter and total 147 148 hash dept counter and total gt hash dept counter and total bottle return dept counter and total bottle return dep
161. as follows VAT1 tax1 VAT2 tax2 VAT3 tax3 VAT4 tax4 VAT5 tax5 VAT6 tax6 When the multiple VAT tax is assigned to a department or a PLU a smaller number of the VAT tax will be printed For details contact your authorized SHARP dealer 66 moov Key Operation Print PLU 00008 1 2 00 2 00 When the manual VAT1 through SUBTOTAL PLU00008 VAT6 system is selected VAT CASH_TOTAL SUBTOTAL 2 00 TAXI ST 2 00 VAT 1 0 14 NET 1 1 86 CASH 2 00 VAT shift entries This feature is intended to shift the tax status of a particular item to another tax status VAT item shift and VAT transaction shift are available to shift a tax status e VAT item shift The tax status of one item only is shifted You can use the VATSFT ITEM key e VAT transaction shift Tax status of all sales items are shifted By touching the VATSFT TRANS key during a transaction e Automatic VAT shift operation VAT shift operation may be activated automatically under the following situations e Automatic VAT shift by clerk The VAT shift is performed automatically by programmed VAT shift status for each clerk e Automatic VAT shift by terminal The VAT shift is performed automatically by programmed VAT shift status for each terminal e Manual VAT shift operation For the manual VAT shift operation take the following procedures Procedure For the VAT item shift touch the VATSFT_ITEM key to a
162. ccepted COMPULSORY Compulsory non add code entry NON COMPULSORY Non compulsory non add code entry YES Opens the drawer NO Disables the drawer opening COMPULSORY Compulsory validation printing NON COMPULSORY Non compulsory validation printing NON ADD DRAWER OPEN VP 233 Currency exchange key MEDIA FOREIGN CURRENCY FOREIGN1 through FOREIGNO PGM2 FOREIGN CURRENCY FOREIGN1 through FOREIGNO PGM1 1 Select the PGM2 or PGM1 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming When the PGM2 mode is selected touch the MEDIA button to display the menu 2 Touch the FOREIGN CURRENCY button to display the currency exchange key list 3 Select the currency exchange key to program details 4 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 4 satisfactorily 5 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter RATE Currency exchange rate 0 000000 to 999 999999 TEXT Description for the currency exchange key Up to 12 characters can be entered TAB Tabulation 0 to 3 DESCRIPTOR Currency descriptor Up to 4 characters can be entered Foreign currency drawer MEDIA FOREIGN CURRENCY FOREIGN DRW PGM2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the MEDIA button to display the menu and touch the FO
163. cese ee A A Oates 105 Transferring cash Rer TIT EAT en tal op Ri TR SEE 105 Cashing a check lt lt 2 3 lt 106 Service charge Ba sone neice MWe VU RED Cece P ovr O T O 107 VIP sales Gita ia quee efe ded ladies dn ving lus a odes ee a a aaa Vu d uu ui 108 Customer Management dude sive asa 109 Basic operations has kn a a a a insere l a e e a a e a a a n ate We ave it stays eee aa ou 111 Name and address printing on receipt bill S 112 Customer bill printing kat Que ge nq o du suia oe Veo OY do dede vx d vie duis pe do npe deje wii E e lee Uu e ma cle ead e Pn 114 Employee Function 115 Employee s working time recording PPP CURE iM EE 116 Employee s working time shift m HH Henne nnns 120 Customer Relation Management EHE THEE HIERO ARTIS kn HERR HOHER A RS 121 Group discount entries DJ CEP RET EPIS EDI I 121 Bonus points
164. ch parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 3 satisfactorily 4 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter YES NO RCPT WINDOW EDIT EURO OPTIONAL gt EURO PGM2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the OPTIONAL button to display the menu and touch the EURO button to program details 3 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 3 satisfactorily 4 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter Preset the date to execute the automatic EURO modification operation DATE Enter the day 2 digits month 2 digits and year 2 digits in this sequence Preset the time of the date to execute the automatic EURO modification operation Enter the hour 00 23 NO Does not convert the preset unit prices of Dept PLU EAN to the ones of EURO currency in the automatic EURO modification operation YES Converts the preset unit prices of Dept PLU EAN in the automatic EURO modification operation The preset rate of the EXCH 1 key is applied as the conversion rate and the calculation method is set to division NON COMPULSORY Non compulsory the automatic EURO modification operation in the X2 Z2 mode after the preset date COMPULSORY Compulsory the automatic EURO modification operation in the EU
165. code max 5 digits 0 218 Non PLU code format ARTICLE gt EAN NON PLU PGM2 Format table Format 1 through Format 12 EAN 13 type EAN 8 type EE JEE SEES Flag Free format __J Free format 02 or 20 29 Flag Price check digit I Field 1 3 Field 2 Free format area 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the ARTICLE button to display the menu and touch the EAN NON PLU button to display the format list 3 Touch or enter the format number and touch the ENTER key to program the format 4 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 4 satisfactorily 5 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter EAN8 EAN 8 format code TYPE OF CODE EAN13 EAN 13 format code UPC A is On of EAN13 SYSTEM CODE n EAN8 nn EAN13 UPC A LENGTH FIELD 1 Length of field 1 0 to 9 LENGTH FIELD 2 Length of field 2 0 to 9 FIELD 1 DATA FREE fixed FREE Meaning of field 2 FIELD 2 DATA QUANTITY quantity PRICE Price Price Check digit PRICE CHECK DIGIT YES Use the price check digit NO Not use the price check digit TAB TAB or decimal point of field 2 3 2 1 0 219 Press code for EAN ARTICLE gt PRESS CODE
166. contact your authorized SHARP dealer Procedure lt FF method for speedy entries gt HALF PINT gt Direct PLU key lt Normal method gt HALF PINT gt Direct PLU key HALF PINT PLU code PLU EAN HALF_PINT gt 60 Scan EAN code HALF PINT EAN code PLU EAN KeyOpemtion Display HALF_PINT 2 X QTY PLU 00001 HALF_PINT PLU 00002 200 60 1 20 CASH_TOTAL PLU00001 1x0 70 0 70 PLU00002 CASH 1 90 1 90 59 H Happy hour If the date time range is programmed for each happy hour the price corresponding to the price level is automatically registered within the time range When the entry time becomes to be out of the time range the price level returns to the level before the time range You can program Happy hour price shift YES NO for each clerk The following examples show that 9 00 AM and 11 00 AM are programmed for price level 2 Gia e Between 9 00 AM and 11 00 AM Key Operation Display PLU 00001 0001 PLUDOOO1 CASH 1 00 1 00 GT gt Excepting the time range from 9 00 and 11 00 Key Operation Display PLU 00001 00001 CASH 2 00 2 00 60 H Crate entries Using the CRATE or CRATE01 through CRATE99 key you can sell bottles of drinks in a crate A crate is a box for transporting and storing drink bottles To use this function you need to program the followin
167. cters PLU GROO through PLU GR99 242 PLU hourly group text TEXT PLU HOURLY GROUP PGM2 You can program a maximum of 12 characters for each PLU hourly group 1 to 9 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the TEXT button to display the menu and touch the PLU HOURLY GROUP button to display the group list 3 Touch or select the group and touch the ENTER key to program characters 4 Enter characters and touch the OK key 5 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter TEXT max 12 characters HOUR GR1 through HOUR PLU information text TEXT gt PLU INFORMATION PGM2 You can program information text in PLU information text tables 1 to 9999 The PLU information text table consists of 10 lines and up to 20 characters can be entered in each line 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the TEXT button to display the menu and touch the PLU INFORMATION button to display the information table list 3 Touch or enter the table number and touch the ENTER key to program characters 4 Enter characters and touch the OK key 5 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter PLU INFORMATION nnnn max 20 characters X 10 lines 243 Clerk PERSONNEL gt CLERK PGM2 or PGM1 1 Select the PGM
168. ction Yes Crate table text CRATEO2 Key Operation Display 2 CRATE 001 PLU EANS in the bottles need to be PLU 00010 iex Entered until the quantity reaches the PLU 00010 Specified number of bottles PLU 00013 1x0 20 0 20 PLU 00013 00009 PLU 00013 CASH 5 70 PLU 00012 CASH_TOTAL TTA 5 70 The preset prices of the PLU codes 10 12 and 13 are ignored The formula for the amount registered is the same as that of single entries e The entry of the PLU EANS in the bottles only PLU codes 10 12 13 in the above example is allowed e f open price entry is preset for the PLU EANS in the bottles the setting is ignored e When you want to make a multiplication entry the quantity must be an integer and no more than the number of bottles specified in the crate table 62 Display of Subtotals Your POS terminal provides the following types of subtotals Subtotal Touch the SUBTOTAL key at any point during a transaction The sales subtotal including tax will appear in the display Difference subtotal Differ ST Touch the DIFFER_ST key at any point during a transaction When you touch it first the subtotal of all entries which have been made is displayed and printed If you touch it second you will get the subtotal of entries which have been made after you got the first subtotal Taxes are calculated each time you touch the DIFFER_ST key Key Operation PLU 00001 PLU 00
169. ctivate the VAT shift prior to entering of PLU EAN concerned For the VAT transaction shift touch the VATSFT TRANS key at the end of a transaction GT case of VAT shift by transaction Key Operation Print VATSFT IRANS 1 2 00 x2 00 PLU 00008 00008 CASH TOTAL vct When the automatic VAT1 through l SUBTOTAL x2 00 VAT6 system is selected TAX2 ST 00 T 0 06 NET 2 1 94 CASH 2 00 e If you want to achieve the VAT shift at the end of transaction contact your authorized SHARP dealer e To program the initial status of the POS terminal to be in the VAT shift mode Initial VAT SHIFT please contact your authorized SHARP dealer 67 Guest Check GLU Your POS terminal is provided the guest lookup GLU system GLU system The balance due and the details of the order are placed in the guest check file The information can be automatically recalled by entering a guest check code a GLU code when additional ordering occurs GLU system e New guest Procedure For automatic GLU code generation 1 _ GLU code GLU Guest no entry Item entries 1 to 9999 9 max 2 digits 4 NBAL RCPT Lt FINAL gt SLIP je XXXXXX gt RA Us Payment operations gt VP 3 When paid in full settlement e A clerk must has been registered before starting GL
170. culations premium discount merchandise subtotal or individual you may use the n key Percentage 0 01 to 100 00 Procedure For item entries Item entry Percent rate n When the programmed percent rate is used touch the n key without entering the percent rate For the subtotal SUBTOTAL Percent rate gt n When the programmed percent rate is used touch the n key without entering the percent rate Key Operation Display PLU 00002 m 961 1x1 00 1 00 PLU 00003 PLUDODOS SUBTOTAL SUBTOTAL 1 90 7 5 2 7 507 CASH_TOTAL gt 0 14 CASH 1 76 1 76 E Discount entries For item discount or subtotal discount you can use the n key when it is allowed by the programming Procedure For item entries Item entry Discount amount gt n When the programmed discount amount is used touch the n key without entering the discount amount For the subtotal Discount amount n When the programmed discount amount is used touch the n key without entering the discount amount Key Operation Display PLU 00002 C1 PLU00002 PLU 00003 1 0 20 85 21 1x1 00 1 00 CASH TOTAL PLUOO003 22 0 85 CASH 0 95 0 95 96 H Refund entries For a refund entry touch the REFUND key just before you touch a department key DEPT key direct PLU key or PLU_EAN key or just before you scan an
171. de ENTER ES Override Entries Programmed limits such as maximum amounts for functions can be overridden by placing the POS terminal in the manager mode 140 Tip Paid Entries This operation is used when tips that guests have paid by using media other than cash check or credit are paid to respective clerks in cash You can make tip paid entries in the MGR mode only The tips are paid to corresponding clerks according to their portions To perform the tip paid entry enter the clerk code then touch the TIP_PAID key Bill Recording Bill Void The bill information is recorded to the Closed Transaction File Bill recording Each record contains bill consecutive number cashier number issued date and amount The bill record can be voided from the Closed Transaction File Bill void The voided bill number will be used on a newly issued bill to fill the bill report completely Procedure gt Bill number gt BILL GC RCPT 141 Correction after Finalizing a Transaction Void mode When you need to void incorrect entries that clerks cannot correct incorrect entries that are found after finalizing a transaction or cannot be corrected by subtotal void the following procedure can be performed in the MGR mode Procedure 1 Enter the manager code and touch the MGR key then enter the secret code if applicable 2 Touch the key to put your POS terminal in the VOID m
172. digits Item entries gt G C RCPT NBAL FINAL gt SLIP When paid in full settlement r gt XXXXXX gt RA Payment operations a VP The transaction migration can be operated before payment operation was made Key Operation PLU 00002 PLU 00003 1006 GLU NBAL 86 Display MWIOO6 PLUOOQ02 2x1 00 2 00 PLUOOOO3 1x6 20 6 20 00002 36 30 H Recall transaction You can recall data of closed transactions All payment operations are canceled for the recalled guest checks and the transaction is opened again Following operation are available after a recall e To correct items e To add tip e To edit media Procedure 1 Enter the transaction no RECALL TRANS The transaction is recalled If the transaction is selected from the closed transaction list touch the RECALL_TRANS key without a transaction no entry to display the closed transaction list RECALL TRANSACTION Then select the object transaction and touch the ENTER key to recall the transaction To cancel the operation touch the CANCEL key 2 Perform entries for the recalled transaction Key Operation Display RECALL_TRANS 011003 Select the transaction 0000186 ENTER 115 20 15 20 CASH TOTAL PLUOO003 12 60 2 60 PLU00005 PARTIAL PAY 8 90 CASH 8 90 87 Ordering System H Customer
173. e 5 and taxable 6 subtotals This calculation is performed using the corresponding programmed percentages when the VAT key is touched just after the SUBTOTAL key e Manual VAT 1 through 6 system Manual entry method using programmed percentages Procedure SUBTOTAL VAT rate VAT SUBTOTAL VAT When the programmed rate is used This system enables the VAT calculation for the then subtotal This calculation is performed using the VAT 1 preset percentages when the VAT key is touched just after the SUBTOTAL key For this system the keyed in tax rate can be used e Manual tax 1 through 6 system Manual entry method using programmed percentages SUBTOTAL gt VAT This system provides the tax calculation for taxable 1 taxable 2 taxable 3 taxable 4 taxable 5 and taxable 6 subtotals This calculation is performed using the corresponding programmed percentages when the VAT key is touched just after the SUBTOTAL key After this calculation you must finalize the transaction e Automatic VAT 1 through and tax 4 through 6 system This system enables the calculation in the combination with automatic VAT 1 through 3 and tax 4 through 6 This combination can be any of VAT 1 through 3 and tax 4 through 6 The tax amount is calculated automatically with the percentages previously programmed for these taxes VAT tax assignment is printed at the fixed right position of the amount on the receipt and bill
174. e at the left of the cursor Used to copy the data from the designated item Touch this key and select designated item Used to change the page of the data or items Used to change the page of the data or items Used to enter the data Used to terminate the programming Used to clear entered data Used to display the variation of parameter Used to skip to next item Used to back to previous item Used to enter the text data Used to display item list Used to display registration screen Used to select the screen Used to change the display position of sub window Used to page up the window Used to page down the window Used to control the cursor down Used to control the cursor up Used to copy the text data Used to paste the text data POS Setting Data The POS setting data can be confirmed with the following tables The default programming data of parameters is emphasized in bold character H Department ARTICLE DEPARTMENT PGM2 or PGM1 1 Select the PGM2 or PGM1 mode in the mode selection window and touch the SETTING to perform the programming Touch the ARTICLE button to display the detail menu Touch the DEPARTMENT button to program the each department Enter or select the department number and touch the ENTER key Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key 2 3 4 5 TP Po
175. e last entered 2 bill A maximum of 5 bills is available for 2 e The GLU code of 1 must be in use If the guest check s of 1 or 2 has already been handled by another clerk the guest check s must have been made Transferring out Key Operation Display 1005 GLU LU TUUG5 001 1x1 00 1 00 NBAL 1 1 00 1 00 00003 16 20 6 20 00002 34 30 78 e Bill transfer This function is used to change the GLU code of a particular bill CANCEL MT 7 gt OPENED_GLU Select the GLU code gt B T iL Touch the GLU code ale L Enter the GLU code ENTER gt 1 Enter the GLU code GLU 2 Enter the new GLU code GLU NBAL e This function requires that the current GLU code be entered for 1 and a new GLU code be entered for 2 e A 1 bill is transferred to a 2 bill The 1 bill is then cleared and set free Key Operation Display 1001 GLU fLuLOLO 0001 B T 1x2 00 2 00 NBAL 1x1 50 1 0 PLUOOQ01 16 20 6 20 PLUOOOO6 9 70 79 Bill separating This function is used when each guest of a group pays his or her own order With this function you can select some items from a guest check and make an entry for the payment Also you can transfer the items you have selected to other guest checks There are three types of the bill
176. e the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter RATE Percent rate 0 00 to 99 999 TEXT Description for the commission Up to 12 characters can be entered 225 H Miscellaneous functions deposit RA PO cash tip non cash tip cash in drawer check change FUNCTIONS PMISC FUNCTIONS PGM2 Miscellaneous functions e Deposit or Deposit refund e RA or RA2 e PO or PO2 e Cash tip e Non Cash tip e Cash in drawer e Check change 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the FUNCTIONS button to display the menu and touch the MISC FUNCTIONS button to display the function list 3 Touch the DEPOSIT DEPO RA RA2 PO PO2 CASH TIP NON CASH TIP CID or CHK CG button to program details 4 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 4 satisfactorily 5 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key DEPOSIT or DEPO Text Parameter A Significant digit for HALO 1 through 9 HALO B Number of zeros to follow the significant digit for HALO 0 through 8 is the same as A x 108 TEXT Description for the deposit or deposit refund Up to 12 characters can be entered RA or RA2 Text Parameter A Significant digit for HALO 1 through 9 HALO B Number of zeros to follow the si
177. ealer German type 2 EURO code The price is coded in EURO Ec Add on code from January 2002 LL NN Article code Price xx xx Currency for price is EURO Prefix code 414 or 419 United Kingdom Currency for price is GBP bod d P i 3 Add on code Article code Price xx xx 4 Prefix code 988 or 989 France Currency for price on the prefix code 378 is 378 i S 66 EURO 379 is FFr The price is converted Article code 4 F Price xx xx 4 automatically according to EURO status Prefix code Supplier code Sweden Currency for price is SKr 7131818 i Add on code F Prefix code Article code Price xxx x 4 e The availability of these press codes on your register depends on the programming e Since the price in a press code is read for sales entries and the currency is decided by the code note that the code you enter for sales matches your domestic currency 327 H Add on code UPC A and EAN 13 may be followed by a two digits number or a five digits number as add on code excepting UPC A without a check digit plus two or five digits add on code Therefore the total number of digits enterable for sales entries are as shown below Code entry No add on code 2 digit add on code 5 digit add on code UPC A 12 14 17 UPC A w leading zero 13 15 18
178. ear the data Data file Classification 1 E JOURNAL Electronic journal data 2 T LOG T LOG data file 3 TRANSACTION Transaction data file 4 CLERK Clerk data file 5 CASHIER Cashier data file 6 HOURLY Hourly data file 7 DAILY NET Daily net data file 8 SIGN ON FLAG Sign on flag 9 GLU USED FLAG GLU used flag 3 To finish the operation touch the EXIT key 292 PRICE Mode Programming The PRICE mode programming is mainly used for daily changes of the PLU s unit price To program a unit price for a PLU as follows Procedure 1 Select the PRICE mode in the mode selection window the programming window is displayed 2 To select the screen touch the SELECT SCREEN button and select the required screen Touch the objective PLU key 2 When you want to use the PLU list touch the LIST MENU button and enter the PLU code or select the PLU in the PLU list window 3 Enter the new unit price for a PLU 4 To finish the operation touch the EXIT key 293 Automatic Sequencing Key Programming Just one touch of an automatic sequencing key enables you to perform a set of frequently used key operations that are assigned to the automatic sequencing key There are a maximum of 99 automatic sequencing keys available You can also assign a maximum of 15 automatic sequencing keys to each of the 6 AUTO menu keys Touching an AUTO menu key opens a menu window to select the assigned automatic seque
179. ect entry relating to item entries percent entries amount discount entries refund entries return entries manual amount tax entries and tip entries you can void or correct entries as follows Procedure e Voiding the entry 1 Select the line of designated item in the receipt window The selected line will be highlighted 1 PLUO0001 1 00 1 PLUOO002 2 00 2 Touch the key 1 PLUOO001 1 00 e Voiding the printed entry 1 Select the line of designated item in the receipt window The selected line will be highlighted 1 PLUO0001 1 00 1 PLUOO003 3 00 1 PLUOOOO4 2 Touch the key 1 PLUOO0001 1 PLU00002 1 PLU00003 1 PLU00004 e Voiding multiple item 1 Select the lines of designated items in the receipt window The selected line will be highlighted 2 Touch the key 127 e Repeat the item entry 1 Select the line of designated item in the receipt window The selected line will be highlighted 1 PLUOO0001 1 00 1 PLUOO0002 2 00 2 Touch the key 1 PLUOOOO1 1 00 1 PLUOO002 2 00 e Repeat the serviced item entry 1 Select the line of designated item in the receipt window The selected line will be highlighted 1 PLUOO0001 1 00 1 PLUOOOO4 4 00 2 Touch the key 1 PLUO0001 1 PLU00002 1 PLUOO0003 1 PLUOOOO4 128 Subtotal Void You can void an entire transaction Once subtotal void is executed the transactio
180. edit customer taxable 1 ST CC VAT1 Credit customer VAT TAX 1 CC TAX2 ST Credit customer taxable 2 ST CC VAT2 Credit customer VAT TAX 2 CC TAX3 ST Credit customer taxable 3 ST VAT3 Credit customer VAT TAX 3 CC TAX4 ST Credit customer taxable 4 ST CC VAT4 Credit customer VAT TAX 4 CC TAX5 ST Credit customer taxable 5 ST CC VAT5 Credit customer VAT TAX 5 262 Text Classification Parameter CC TAX6 ST Credit customer taxable 6 ST SKIP NOT SKIP CC VAT6 Credit customer VAT TAX 6 CC TTL TAX Credit customer total tax NET Net without tax VAT SFT VAT shift TAX DELE VAT tax delete CC VAT SFT Credit customer VAT shift CC TAX DELE Credit customer VAT tax delete SER CHRG Service charge NET2 Net 2 ITEM Discount for item ITEM Percent calculation for item GR DISCOUNT Group discount DISCOUNT Promotion discount CP PLU Coupon like PLU BON PTS Bonus points for item BON PTS AMT Bonus points for amount BONUS POINTS Bonus points total BON PTS RDM Bonus point redemption REDEMPT TL Bonus point redemption total REFUND Refund VD Item void VOID Void mode transaction MGR VD MGR void ST VD Subtotal void WASTE WASTE mode transaction RETURN Return HASH VD Hash void HASH RF Hash refund HASH RT Hash return NOTURNVD Non turnover void NOTURNRF Non turnover refund NOTURNRT Non turnover retu
181. ee eee 131 Barcode Printing eee ee eee eee eee eee eee eee teeter rer eee ree eee eee ee eee eee rere eter reer eee eee eee eee eee eee ree rere r rere eee rere 132 Entertainment Bill mm HH 133 Type of Receipt eee ee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee ere rte eee reer reer eee eee ee eee ree terre rere eee rere eee eee eee eee teeter eee eee eee nw 134 Sorted Receipt Function 137 Electronic Journal eee eee eee eee eee eee ee eer ee rere rere ee eee rere eee eee eee eter rere rere eee rere eee eee ere eter errr ee terre rere ee 139 Electronic Mail mmm HH 139 8 Manager 140 Entering the Manager Mode eee eee EE EE eee eee eee eee eee eee tee tere eee eee eee eee eee rete ee etree eter rere reer eee eee LL AE 140 Override Entries m 140 Tip Paid Entries mH 141 Bill Recording Bill Void mmm HII 141 Correction after Finalizing a Transaction Void mode 142 9 Reading X and Resetting 2 of Sales Totals eee ee eee eee eee eee eee eee teeter reer eee eee ee eee n 00 0L 143 How to take a reading X1 X2 or or resetting Z1 Z2 or OPZ report m 143 Flash report eee
182. ee eee eee eee eee eee eee teeter er eee reer ee eee eee eee ee rer rer eee eee eee eee eee eee eee teeter ere eee eee eee eee eee 143 Report errr tect 144 Daily Report Samples eee eee eee eee eee ere eter rere eee eee ee eee eee eee ee teeter ere ee eee eee eee ee eee teeter rere reer EE EE 147 Periodic Report Samples eee ee eee eee eee eee eee eee ee ee teeter reer eee reer eee eee eee ere teeter rer eee reer errr rere ee eee eee retraite ey 182 Non accessed EAN and Customer Deletion eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eter rere EE rere re eee eee eee eee ere Terres 191 Compulsory Cash Check Declaration CCD mmm eene 192 10 Programming eee eee eee eee eee eee EE EE EE EE EE eee ee eee ee ee eee terre rere ree rere eee eee eee eee rer rere ree rere reer eee reece retreat ee ete 194 Programming Menu Processing EE eee eee eee eee eee eee teeter ee eee eee eee ee eee eee reer etre rer err ere eee wn ELLA 194 PGM1 REDDERE 194 PGM2 REDDE 195 How to Program Alphanumeric Characters II eee eee eee eee teeter eee rer rere rere er ere eee eee eee eee teeter rer ere ree 200 Alphanumeric Characters eee ee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee tee EE EE EE EE EE RE OO treet etre rere ree rere eee A 201 Basic Instructions epee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee ere ere eee eee eee
183. eee eee ee eee teeter terre rere reer reer eee eee ee eee teeter teeter eer errr ee 202 Programming example eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee EE EE EE EE EN OO eee ee eee ee ere eter rere rere eee eee ee eee eee 202 Programming function key eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eter EE EE EE ere reer eee eee errr eee terre rere ree re eee rete ee 204 POS Setting Department eee eee eee eee eee eee eee EE eee eee eee eee eee rere rere eee eee rere eee eee reer eee eee ree ee eee eee ere ee PLU EAN pee eee eee eee eee eee eee er etter err er eee eee eee rere eee eee eter rer ere reer reer eee ee eee eee teeter rer eee ree eee eee re eee eerie PLU range ee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee er ee EE EE EE ee eee EN eee eee eter ee reer ere reer eee eee ee eee eee eee eee EE EE EE EE EE EE Dynamic mmm HH lt ne PLU menu key eee eee eee ee eee eee eee eee eter eee eee eee eee eee eee tee
184. egistrations 1 Printed in case Memory of difference due to rounding is programmed For details please consult your authorized SHARP dealer 2 The following is printed in case add on tax is included For details please consult your authorized SHARP dealer NET2 3771 04 151 Department by group report X15 Dept code DEPT GROUP Sales qiy Dept description DO1 987 230 0 95 53 DPT O 1 3607 87 Sales amount GUEST 147 0 Guest counter DEDUCTION 8 Item deduction q ty Item deduction amount Ratio of dept 2 sales amount to dept total 3 65 DOZ 8 0000 0 32 27 02 11 94 GUEST 3 0 Group 1 total sales q ty DEDUCTION 10 a GROUP 993 230 0 5 85 619 81 Group 1 total sales amount DEDUCTION 94 Group 1 text 4 05 Group 1 deduction total amount Group 1 deduction total q ty GROUPS 8000 0 77 29 10 DEDUCTION 20 0 90 DEPT TL 1032 230 Q 100 004 OR KANTA YO 3776 63 dept counter total DEDUCTION 19 0 B 18 department deduction q ty and total D13 6 000 0 DPT 13 15 60 GUEST 40 DEPT 6 000 45 80 gt dept counter and total D14 7 000 0 DPT 14 38 06 GUEST 30 HASH TL 1 000 q 38 06 hash dept counter and total 15 3 000 0 DT 15 4 51 GUEST 20 HASH 3 000 gt hash dept counter and total 4 51 D1
185. eived the electronic mail Level shift no Price level VAT shift mode Receipt switch off Receipt shift symbol Appears when the cash in drawer exceeds the programmed sentinel amount The sentinel check is performed for the total cash in drawer When a VMP file used memory is 9096 or more its file number is indicated Appears when the stock of the PLU which you entered is zero negative or reaches the minimum stock Electronic journal memory is full Green gt Yellow Red T Log memory is full Green Yellow gt Red 10 Ten key pad window The Ten key pad is used to enter various numerical data e g clerk code amounts quantities When numeric entries are necessary e g secret code is forced the ten key pad pops up automatically Clerk code name LOIP1 OPENED 00 Veri 01 8000 Numeric entry The entry displays here e Registration screen The registration screen consists of several sub windows Receipt Menu Category Function Ten key pad When the cashier is signed on a registration screen is displayed automatically Screen example Information Status Item key LOIP1 195 30 00003 1x6 90 6 90 100008 186 00 6 90 PLUOOOO TOTAL 20 70 zl PLUOODO7 6 50 EI pas 2 HOME Xv NAME amp ADD e r
186. em PM P II VAT shift entries Guest Check GLU diodes aa eid va qae uu d vale E E e ee read reale us ae Te EE Edda rec dre daleva e diee Gn aji kra Room GLU entry Deposit entries Mesthacca o Transferring guest out or in Transfer out in IE 75 Bill printing enne 76 Intermediate GLU reading Me Ce M EMEN RR E CR ME EE DE TT Bill totalizing bill Ira i e 78 Bill separating DERE RUE AE IA EU IE OT IR ORT LIS CET EDT CDD CIE ATT T 80 Transaction migration 86 Recall transaction mme eene een en nennen nnns 87 Ordering System bean ccd te ve dde ciate be eate ades ene dated od ee bi Mera ul eire ale utra de 88 Customer advance ordering MDC M 88 Credit customer advance ordering e OIR ete ve dee PULL UCET 91 Article order MASKS HH 94 Auxiliary Entries aise bab ee Chee ve n ai a n a a m m l n a Da ete n Do m m kn a e a e an n ik kid at a k a 95 Percent calculations Yo premium or 96 discount
187. ent quantity in the general report SKIP Skips department Yoshare the general report 0 PEU eee NOT SKIP Does not skip department share in the general report 261 Transaction report format REPORT TRANS RPT FORMAT PGM2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the REPORT button to display the menu and touch the TRANS RPT FORMAT button to program details 3 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTERI key Repeat this step 3 satisfactorily 4 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Classification Parameter DEPT TL dept total SKIP NOT SKIP DEPT dept total HASH TL Hash total HASH Hash total BTTL TL Bottle return total BTTL Bottle return total NT TL1 Non turnover 1 total NT TL2 Non turnover 2 total NT TL3 Non turnover 3 total ST Discount for subtotal ST Percent calculation for subtotal NET 1 Net sales total DIFFER Difference 1 ST Taxable 1 subtotal VAT1 VAT tax 1 TAX2 ST Taxable 2 subtotal VAT2 VAT tax 2 TAX3 ST Taxable 3 subtotal VAT3 VATI tax 3 TAX4 ST Taxable 4 subtotal VAT4 VAT tax 4 TAX5 ST Taxable 5 subtotal VAT5 VAT tax 5 TAX6 ST Taxable 6 subtotal VAT6 VAT tax 6 TTL TAX Total tax CC TAX1 ST Cr
188. ent table is as shown below Example PLU PLU Name Price Condiment Table PLUOOO21 STEAK 20 00 1 PLU00038 BAKED P 0 50 5 Condiment table Condiment 2 Condiment PLU ontents ondimen Tapis Table PLU Name Price PLU00023 RARE 0 00 1 HOWCOOK 4 PLU00025 MED RARE 0 00 PLU00027 WELLDONE 0 00 PLU00033 P CHIPS 0 60 4 POTATO End nothing PLU00037 MASHED P 0 60 PLU00038 BAKED P 0 50 PLU00040 BUTTER 0 00 FLAVOR End nothing 1100041 SOURCREAM 0 00 Operation Entry Printing STEAK STEAK 20 00 RARE RARE MASHED P MASHED P 0 60 The terminal will continue to operate for the condiment entry until you finish the entire condiment entry programmed for the PLU During the condiment entry if you enter a normal PLU which is not in the condiment table an error message will appear 56 When the C NEXT key is touched the entry skips to the next table which is programmed When the CANCEL key is touched its condiment entry is canceled When you enter a PLU priced at 0 00 only the text will be printed on the receipt e Single entry method The items of the condiment table must be entered for each menu item by one set individually Example 3 steaks process Operation Display Receipt window Note 3 Steak How cook for 1 st steak Rare Vegetable Peas 1x Steak Rare Peas How cook for 2
189. er on a double receipt NORMAL Prints a normal header on a double receipt VAT SHIFT BY SHIFT Allows VAT shift to be accomplished by the shift key BY CLERK Allows VAT shift to be accomplished by a clerk LEVEL SHIFT TYPE MANUAL Lock shift mode AUTO Automatic return mode LEVEL SHIFT LIMITED Allowed only in the MGR mode PUBLIC Allowed in the REG and MGR modes LEVEL RETURNTIMING When the PLU level shift system is set to AUTO the PLU level can be returned to level 1 by one of the following methods RECEIPT Returns the PLU level to level 1 by one receipt BY ITEM Returns the PLU level to level 1 by one item PRICE SHIFT TYPE MANUAL Lock shift mode AUTO Automatic return mode PRICE SHIFT LIMITED Allowed only in the MGR mode PUBLIC Allowed in the REG and MGR modes PRICE RETURNTIMING When the PLU price level shift method is set to AUTO the price level can be returned to price 1 by one of the following methods RECEIPT Returns the price level to price 1 by one receipt BY ITEM Returns the price level to price 1 by one item NON TURNOVER IN VAT Enables non turnover including VAT EX VAT Disables non turnover including VAT QTY IN VIP UPDATE Updates the sales quantity of VIP sale NON Does not update the sales quantity of VIP sale UPDATE Updates a credit totalizer when finalizing a received on account or a paid out entry by a credit key CR
190. erforation Single recceipt Single recceipt The contents of this type of receipt is same as the addition receipt type However the same receipt will be issued two times e Double addition single receipt type The contents of this type of receipt is same as the addition single receipt type However the same receipt will be issued two times 136 Sorted Receipt Function When the sorted receipt function is programmed for your POS terminal PLUs are printed in sorted form by PLU group regardless of the order that you enter items The sort group number is temporarily changed by using the SORT SHIFT key Sort Shift function Group number SORT SHIFT Item entry It is assumed that you enter the items in the following order Operation PLUOO0001 Group 0 1000002 Group 1 PLU00003 Group 2 PLU00004 Group 1 The print format differs depending on the programmed receipt type as follows e Addition receipt type This is printed immediately LOGO after entering gt Header the PLU of group 0 00001 Header Header GROUP1 TEXT GROUPO TEXT PLUOO002 PLUOO0001 PLUOO004 GROUP1 TEXT They are printed PLUOO002 when the PLU00004 transaction is Header GROUP2 TEXT finalized PLUO0003 GROUP2 TEXT PLUOO003 CASH Footer This is printed when you touch the G C RCPT key after the transaction After transaction receipt 137 e Addition s
191. etting operation in OPXZ mode P SFT START Price level range start PRICE 1 through PRICE 8 To be continued 246 P SFT END Price level range end PRICE 1 through PRICE 8 HAPPY HOUR NO Disables the happy hour price shift YES Enables the happy hour price shift CUST BILL PRINT DISABLE Disables customer bill printing ENABLE Enables customer bill printing CUST BILL DELETE DISABLE Disables customer bill deletion ENABLE Enables customer bill deletion AUTO MENU1 DISABLE Disables each AUTO menu 1 key ENABLE Enables each AUTO menu 1 key AUTO MENUS DISABLE Disables each AUTO menu 6 key ENABLE Enables each AUTO menu 6 key m Manager PERSONNEL MANAGER PGM2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the PERSONNEL button to display the menu and touch the MANAGER button to display the manager list 3 Select or enter the manager number and touch the ENTER key to program details 4 Enter the secret code and touch the ENTER key 5 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter SECRET CODE Secret code max 4 digits 0000 to 9999 247 Employee PERSONNEL gt EMPLOYEE PGM2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the PERSONNEL button to display the menu and touch the EMPLOYEE button to displa
192. even if not used Therefore to insure an adequate initial charge in the protection circuit and to prevent any possible loss of memory upon installation it is recommended that each unit be allowed to be recharged for a period of 24 to 48 hours prior to use by the customer After installation the battery pack is charged when the machine is plugged in This recharging precaution can prevent unnecessary initial service calls This product utilizes fluorescent tubes containing a small amount of mercury Disposal of these materials may be regulated due to environmental considerations For disposal or recycling information please contact your local authorities CONTENTS INTRODUCTION emm 1 IMPORTANT 7 mmm HH 1 PRECAUTION em Henne 1 CONTENTS o0 Hense 2 1 Part Names and Functions n Hee 7 External View mmm 7 Front View mmm 7 Rear View 7 Displays eee ee ee eee eee eee eee eee eee e
193. f the terminal The condition listed is only meant to be a reference for the items shown in the Checking column at the right before calling for service e Is power supplied to the electric outlet e Is the AC power cord plug removed or loosely connected to the electrical outlet e Is the AC adapter connector removed or loosely connected to the AC adapter jack e Is the mode switch in the ON I position e The power indicator is not lit 331 List of Options Options For your UP 3515 POS terminal the following options are available For details contact your authorized SHARP dealer Do not try to install any options yourself 1 Integrated rear customer display 2 Remote customer pole display 3 Remote drawer 4 Remote coin case 5 Remote coin case cover 6 Contactless clerk keys RAM memory board 8 EFT interface UP I20DP UP P20DP UP P20DPB ER O3DW ER O3DWB ER O4DW ER 05DW ER 05DWB ER 48CC2 for ER O3DW ER O3DWB ER 48CC3 for ER 04DW ER 58CC for ER 05DW ER 05DWB ER 01CV1 5 for ER 48CC2 ER 02CV1 5 for ER 48CC3 ER 03CV for ER 58CC UP R10CL2 UP SO4MB2 UP SO8MB UP IO4EF e You cannot use UP I20DP and UP P20DP UP P20DPB simultaneously e To use an external thermal printer contact your authorized SHARP dealer 332 16 Specifications Model UP 3515 External dimensions 370 W x 320 D x 320 H mm Weight Approx 7 kg excluding the AC adap
194. g items in the PGM2 mode e Crate table no Crate PLU EAN and its preset price e Number of bottles to pack into the crate e PLU EANS in the bottles max 10 PLU EANs and their price level e Price of the crate table e Combination function Yes combination entries No single entries e Crate table text There are two types of crate entries as shown below e Single entries Use this type of entry to sell a crate of one kind of drink Crate table no 1 Crate PLU EAN PLU code 13 preset price 0 20 Number of bottles 12 PLU EAN in the bottles PLU code 14 price level 1 Price of the crate table 9 80 Combination function No Crate table text CRATEO1 Key Operation Display 1 CRATE 001 CASH_TOTAL CRATEOI 1x0 20 0 20 PLUOOO13 CASH 10 00 TOTAL 10 00 The preset price of the PLU code 14 is 1 20 but it is ignored in the calculation of the amount registered See the following formula e The amount registered the price of the crate table the price of the crate PLU EAN In the above example the registered amount 10 00 9 80 0 20 The entry of the PLU EAN in the bottles only PLU code 14 in the above example is allowed 61 Combination entries Use this type of entry to sell a crate of several kinds of drinks Crate table no 2 Crate PLU EAN PLU code 9 preset price 0 20 Number of bottles 6 PLU EANS in the bottles PLU code 10 12 13 price level 1 Price of the crate table 5 50 Combination fun
195. gnificant digit for HALO 0 through 8 is the same as A x 108 TEXT Description for the RA or RA2 Up to 12 characters can be entered PO or PO2 Text Parameter A Significant digit for HALO 1 through 9 HALO B Number of zeros to follow the significant digit for HALO 0 through 8 is the same as A x 108 TEXT Description for the PO or PO2 Up to 12 characters can be entered CASH TIP or NON CASH TIP Text Parameter A Significant digit for HALO 1 through 9 HALO B Number of zeros to follow the significant digit for HALO 0 through 8 is the same as A x 108 TEXT Description for the cash tip or non cash tip Up to 12 characters can be entered 226 CID Sentinel Text Parameter TEXT Description for the cash in drawer Up to 12 characters can be entered HALO max 9 digits 0 to 999999999 CHK CG Text Parameter TEXT Description for the check change Up to 12 characters can be entered HALO max 8 digits 0 to 99999999 M Service charge FUNCTIONS SERVICE CHARGE PGM2 or PGM1 1 Select the PGM1 or PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the FUNCTIONS button to display the menu and touch the SERVICE CHARGE button to program the service charge 3 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 3 satisfactorily 4 To terminate the program
196. gt Item entries RCPT SHIFT shift to single double entries e Addition receipt type The addition receipt is a standard type Several items can be printed on one receipt Addition receipt 10 00 22 10 08 CLERKOOO1 TxPLUOOOOT 134 e Single double receipt type When you select this type e One receipt is issued and the transaction is finalized each time you enter an item e single receipt or a double receipt is issued depending on the PGM2 programming for the department e Each sales transaction is automatically handled as a cash deal e Items specified as SICS or SIF are treated as a single type e GLU entry is allowed Double receipt Single receipt 14 55 22 10 08 14 55 22 10 08 CLERKOOO1 CLERKOOO1 1xPLUOOOO 1xPLUOOOO1 Perforation 14 55 22 10 08 CLERKOOO 1 DOUBLE 1xPLUOOOO1 e Addition single receipt type When you select this type e An addition receipt and each single receipt are issued in series after you finalize the transaction e Footer logo message is printed at the end of the addition receipt part e The information on multiplication entry will be printed on a single receipt 14 58 22 10 08 CLERKOOO 1 1xPLUOOOO1 1xPLUOOOO2 14 58 22 10 08 CLERKOOO1 txPLUOOOOT1 14 58 22 10 08 CLERKOOO1 1xPLUOOOO2 e Double addition receipt type Addition recceipt P
197. he PERSONNEL button to display the menu and touch the JOB LOCATE TBL button to display the job location table 3 Select or enter the table number and touch the ENTER key to program details 4 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 4 satisfactorily 5 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter TEXT Description for the job location table Up to 12 characters can be entered SALARY AMOUNT Salary amount paid for the employee max 5 digits 0 to 999 99 OVER TIME RATE Rate for overtime work max 4 digits 0 01 to 99 99 0 Overtime pay SALARY AMOUNT x OVER TIME RATE Working time shift PERSONNEL gt WORKING TIME SHIFT PGM2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the PERSONNEL button to display the menu and touch the WORKING TIME SHIFT button to display the working time shift list 1 to 9 3 Touch or select the working time shift number and touch the ENTER key to program details 4 Enter characters and touch the OK key 5 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter Description for the working time shift Up to 12 characters be entered 249 Contact less key PERSONNEL gt CONTACTLESS KEY PGM2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the p
198. he customer record by name touch the SEARCH BY NAME key the text entry window is displayed In the text entry window enter the name and touch the OK key the customer record list is displayed Select the record and touch the ENTER key 109 If the customer name is not found in the list the new record can be created by touching the NEW key then the window is displayed to enter a new customer record To cancel the operation touch the CANCEL key If the customer record is not found in the list the new record can be created in the following window ENTER INFORMATION 6543218970123 NAME ADDRESS VAT Touch the EDIT key for each item and enter NAME ADDRESS VAT ID data and touch the OK key To cancel the operation touch the CANCEL key 110 H Basic operations Key Operation CUSTOMER 0800000000075 ENTER PLU 00003 CASH_TOTAL e To enter a new customer code in the REG MGR mode Key Operation PLU 00003 CUSTOMER 0800000001232 ENTER EDIT NAME_5 OK EDIT ADDR_5 OK OK CASH_TOTAL e When you allow the customer to defer the payment Key Operation CUSTOMER 0800000000075 ENTER PLU 00003 CUST_CHARGE Print 0800000000075 2 ADOR 2 1x 1 00 1 00 PLUOO003 CASH 1 00 0 00 CHARGE 0 00 0 00 Print 08000000012328NAHE 5 ADDR S 1 1 00 1 00 00003 CASH 1 00 xaPBAL 0
199. hecks that have been transferred out Procedure When all guest checks which are transferred out from a clerk are transferred Clerk code CLK TRANS IN Select the GLU code ENTER TRANS_IN Touch the GLU code Enter the GLU code ENTER Enter the GLU code GLU For the next guest check Key Operation Print bei TRAN IN do reu 1001 TRANS IN XPBAL 9 60 75 E Bill printing This function is used for issuing the bill to the guest Your POS terminal can print the bill normal bill or cumulated bill on the slip receipt or journal printer For selecting these printers contact your authorized SHARP dealer Procedure Normal bill Bill on the slip auto feed L gt C BILL No of lines of slip feed ER BILL Cumulated bill gt G C RCPT Bill on the receipt e This function is available immediately after the finalization of transaction e f the copy function is allowed you can print the bill copy on slip and receipt only once If you need the bill copy contact your authorized SHARP dealer eu Key Operation Print G C RCPT BILL 5x 2 00 10 00 PLUOOO0B x 1 00 1 00 PLUO0003 1 1 00 1 00 00002 1 2 00 2 00 STEAK 1 0 60 0 60 MASHED P 76 H Intermediate GLU reading This function is used for temporary inspection of the guest check The details of the guest check can be
200. hier system is applied to your machine e Compulsive when all cashier resetting is taken In case CCD by terminal CCD at the end of the day is applied to your machine e Compulsive when general resetting is taken In case CCD per shift CCD per each working time shift is applied to your machine e Compulsive per shift when general resetting is taken e You can not make a CCD entry at the already CCD completed shift e You can not make any sales registration at the already CCD completed shift e You need to complete CCD entries at all of the programmed working time shifts before taking a general Z1 report e Compulsive when CCD SHIFT ENTRY is selected the OPXZ mode e Compulsive when general resetting is taken with CCD of the last working time shift uncompleted e Compulsive at the working time shift operation You can also allow the employee to make the CCD entry after the working time shift operation by programming Compulsory cash check declaration is available in the above six types You can choose either of these Contact your authorized SHARP dealer for details Procedure 1 When CCD entry is compulsory the following window is displayed for declaring the cash check value in the drawer Select an item from the CCD media list to perform CCD entry CCD ENTRY 2 Enter the cash check value in the drawer When an incorrect entry is made select the designated cell and make a correct entry or void operation
201. ice Department key Selling q ty gt X QTY Base q ty X QTY Unit price AMOUNT Deprt code gt DEPT e Selling q ty Up to 4 digits integer 3 digits decimal e Base q ty Up to 2 digits integer e Direct PLU entries Procedure lt FF method for speedy entries gt For preset only type Selling q ty gt X QTY Base q ty gt Direct PLU key For open and preset type preset price entry Selling q ty gt X QTY Base q ty Direct PLU key lt Normal method gt For preset only type Selling X QTY Base q ty gt X QTY gt Direct PLU key For open only type Selling q ty X QTY Base qty gt X QTY Unit price Direct PLU key For open and preset type open price entry Selling qty X QTY gt Base q ty gt X QTY Unit price Direct PLU key For open and preset type preset price entry Selling q ty X QTY Base gt X QTY gt Direct PLU key e Selling q ty Up to 4 digits integer 3 digits decimal e Base q ty Up to 2 digits integer e When you use a programmed base skip the base q ty entry Base q ty X QTY e PLU code entries Procedure For preset only type Selling qty gt X QTY Base X QTY PLU code gt PLU_EAN For open only type Selling qty X QTY Base gt X QTY Unit price gt AMOUNT PLU code
202. ice is processed to obtain price UPC A e Number system character O used in the source marking 0 ges e Number system character 3 used as NDC or HRI gt EE Makertod fem code Number system character Check digit For entry a full 12 digits number or 11 digits number omitting 5 the check digits must be entered NCD or HRI format e Number system character 2 lt In store marking Non PLU type gt x i i c6 You can program the format in EAN NON PLU in ARTICLE 2 H Item code Price setting Price check digit e Number system character 4 lt In store marking PLU type For entry a full 12 digits number 11 digits number omitting the check digit a leading zero plus 12 digits number must be entered Any numbers are allowed for the digits marked with and on the receipt journal non PLU type code is printed like 202000833 X XXX price information UPC E e UPC E is a zero suppressed version of UPC A that conforms to the UPC E Standards This code is used for marking small package For entry a 6 digits number or a leading zero plus 6 digits number must be entered EAN 8 e Ordinary EAN 8 code flag neither 0 nor 2 lt used in the source marking gt te Maker code E Nation code Item code For entry a f
203. in Break out Edited time Time out Total break time per location Total working time per location Total cost per location Total hour Overtime Total labor cost 183 Employee time adjustment report ugs EHP ADJUSTMENT 0000000001 0000000010 Range Date Operation 0000000001 DAVID K 22 10 2008 TIHE IN 8 45 BREAK IN 11 45 BREAK OUT 12 30 BREAK IN 14 30 BREAK OUT 15 00 22 10 20 fi is TIME OUT 17 00 0000000002 EDWARD 2271 TIME IN 8 47 TIME OUT 15 01 0000000003 ERIC T 80000000005 JIMMY P Operation time before time editing Edited time Employee active status report 4 EMP ACTIVE STATUS 0000000001 0000000001 DAVID K TIHE IN 0000000002 TIME IN 0000000003 IME IN 0000000005 TIKE IN 0000000010 9 00 EDWARD M 8 45 184 Employee code Range Employee name Indicates that the employee is under break Indicates that the employee is not timed in Employee over time report When you take a Z report Z2 is printed instead of X2 2 EMP OVER TIME 0000000001 0000000010 80000000001 7 10 2008 6 30H OVR COST 14 40 0000000002 EDWARD M 22 10 200 OVR TIME 6 45H OVR COST 16 20 Daily net report Mos DAILY NET 01 07 33 0 502 80 02 07 280 9577 53
204. inger and release it The card will Come out e This model supports SD cards only Use of any other types of SD cards such as mini SD micro SD etc with an adapter is not supported e When inserting or removing the SD memory card be sure to release it slowly Otherwise the card may pop out and injure your finger e Never touch or remove the SD memory card while it is accessed otherwise the data stored in it may be damaged e Formatting the SD memory card erases all the data in it SD card formatting When the SD card is not formatted yet take the formatting operation 1 Select the FORMATTING menu in the SD CARD mode the confirmation window is displayed 2 To perform the format operation touch the OK key To cancel the operation touch the CANCEL key Folder code programming The programmed code is used the file folder structure Up to 8 digits code can be programmed Procedure 1 Select the FOLDER CONTROL menu in the SD CARD mode the folder code list window is displayed 2 Select the required folder code from the list and enter the ENTER key To approve the selected folder code touch the JOB SELECTION key To cancel the operation touch the CANCEL key 323 Folder creating The master folder can be created for the data file SHARP ECRXXX05 nnnnnnnn nnnnnnnn folder code Procedure 1 Select the FOLDER CONTROL menu in the SD CARD mode the folder code lis
205. ingle receipt type This is printed immediately after entering gt Header the PLU of group 0 PLUO0001 They are printed when the transaction is finalized 138 Header Header GROUP1 TEXT GROUPO TEXT PLUO0002 PLUO0001 GROUP1 TEXT PLUO0002 PLU00004 GROUP2 TEXT Header PLU00003 PLU00002 CASH Footer PLU00004 Single receipt Header GROUP2 TEXT PLU00003 Header PLU00003 This is printed when you touch the G C RCPT key after the transaction After transaction receipt Electronic Journal This function is intended to record the journal data in electronic memory instead of journal paper Also this data is used instead of Transaction Log data All transaction data and the operation log is kept in the Electronic Journal File Electronic Mail When the information status is displayed the electronic mail is received To display the mail contents touch the E MAIL key 139 Manager mode The manager mode is used when managerial decisions must be made concerning POS terminal entries for example for overriding limitations and for other various non programming managerial tasks Normal POS terminal operations may also be performed in this mode Entering the Manager Mode To enter the manager mode use the following procedure in the REG mode Procedure Manager code max 2 digits MGR gt XXXX Secret co
206. ion You can use this function when you need to change the preset price and or associated department of an EAN item The programmed price and or associated department is changed to the new ones There are two methods for change 1 Price change mode You can change the preset price and or the associated department of an EAN item without entering PGM mode 2 Changing price during a transaction When you has found a wrong EAN price and or associated department upon transaction you can correct them at the time of transaction With the entry of new price and or associated department the preset price and or associated department is automatically changed to the new price and or associated department Procedure 1 Touch the PRICE_CHANGE key then enter the EAN item Price Change mode Touch the PRICE_CHANGE key just after the EAN entry during the transaction The following window is displayed PRICE CHANGE ENTER PRICE If you need to cancel the price change function touch the CANCEL key 2 Enter the price and associated department number then touch the ENTER key To keep the current price and department number touch the ENTER key For the Non PLU type EAN codes having price info and press codes the prices in the codes have the priority over the preset prices So for these codes a changed price is valid only when price change is 48 executed H Combo meal PLU EAN entries Operation is the same as that for
207. ithin the programmed upper limit e Q ty x unit price Up to 8 digits 33 e EAN entries By scanning EAN code gt Q ty gt X QTY gt 69 EAN code entry Q ty gt X QTY EAN code PLU EAN e EAN code max 13 digits 5 digits add on code e Q ty Up to 4 digits integer 3 digits decimal e Q ty x unit price Up to 8 digits e When you enter or scan an undefined code if the terminal is programmed for the learning function as yes you are required to enter its unit price and the associated department Undefined EAN entry Unit price gt ENTER Dept code ENTER Delete no delete selection ENTER Key Operation Display 2 5 X QTY 650 Department 6 1 5 X QTY 600 AMOUNT 5 DEPT PLUDOOOI 2 PLU 00001 2x1 00 2 00 2 X QTY 860 AMOUNT PLU 00001 00001 2 X QTY 1 PLU_EAN 308 70 26 10 3 X QTY 4901780438532 PLU_EAN 01 CASH_TOTAL CASH 93 55 93 59 34 B Split pricing entries You will use this function when your customer wants to purchase more or less than the base quantity of a loose item e Department entries Procedure For using a programmed unit price Selling q ty X QTY Base q ty X QTY Department key Selling q ty gt X QTY Base q ty X QTY Dept code DEPT For entering a unit price Selling q ty X QTY Base q ty gt X QTY Unit pr
208. k pickup _ x1 _ Using the new picking table or report the last picking table PLU EAN top 20 sales E x1 x2 Su SOHO report by sales amount PLU EAN top 20 sales X1 X2 report by sales quantity PLU EAN zero sales report x1 x2 PLU ZERO SALES PLU EAN zero sales report x1 X2 Department code by associated department a PLU EAN code PLU MINIMUM PLU EAN minimum stock 1 The range can be specified by report entering start and end codes PLU PRICE CATEGORY LU ERAN sales report by x1 price category hourly group x1 For an individual time range report by specified range PLU HOURLY GROUP PLU EAN hourly group 1 21 report all Promotion no PROMOTION PLU Promotion PLU EAN report 1 71 range be specified by entering start and end codes 144 Operating modes Report Description 2 1121 X2 Z2 Data to entered Remarks lt Transaction gt TRANSACTION Transaction report x1 x2 TL ID Total in drawer report x1 x2 COMMISSION SALES Commission sales report X1 X2 TAX Tax report X1 X2 CHIEF Chief report x1 lt Personnel gt ALL CLERK All clerk report 1 71 2 72 IND CLERK Individual clerk report XZ 1 71 X222 ALL CASHIER All cashier report X1 Z1 2 22 Only for the clerk cashier system IND CASHIER Individual cashier
209. kips those data that are 0 in the hourly report NOT SKIP Does not skip those data that are 0 in the hourly report SKIP Skips those data that are 0 in the daily net report DAILY NET ey A NOT SKIP Does not skip those data that are O in the daily net report 260 General report format REPORT gt GENERAL RPT FORMAT 2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the REPORT button to display the menu and touch the GENERAL RPT FORMAT button to program details 3 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 3 satisfactorily 4 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter SKIP Skips department data in the general report DEPARTMENT 4 NOT SKIP Does skip department data the general report SKIP Skips transaction data in the general report TRANSACTION NOT SKIP Does not skip transaction data in the general report The programming is effective except the tax data cash in drawer data SKIP Skips tax data in the general report TAX SALE NOT SKIP Does not skip tax data in the general report CID SKIP Skips cash in drawer data in the general report NOT SKIP Does not skip cash in drawer data in the general report DEPT Q TY SKIP Skips department quantity in the general report NOT SKIP Does not skip departm
210. l 1 after touching a direct PLU key or finalizing each transaction The lock shift mode holds the current PLU level until a PLU level shift key is touched e Automatic return mode for PLU levels If your terminal has been programmed for PLU level in the automatic return mode touch a desired PLU level shift key before a numeric entry Procedure Returning every item entry LEVEL2 through LEVEL10 Q ty X QTY Direct PLU key Return to level 1 Level 2 10 gt Q ty X QTY Direct PLU key Return to level 1 Returning every transaction LEVEL 1 through LEVEL 10 Q ty X QTY Direct PLU key gt Finalization Return to level 1 Level 1 10 LEVEL Q ty gt X QTY gt Direct PLU key Finalization gt Return to level 1 When you use the FF method you need not touch the X QTY key for multiplication entries e Lock shift mode for PLU levels If your terminal has been programmed for PLU level in the lock shift mode touch a desired PLU level shift key before a numeric entry Procedure LEVEL 1 through LEVEL10 Q ty X QTY gt Direct PLU key Stay in the current level Level no 1 10 LEVEL gt Q ty gt X QTY gt Direct PLU key Stay in the current level When you use the FF method you need not touch the X QTY key for multiplication entries 52 G
211. layed DELIVERY INFO Enter each item DATE TIME and touch the ENTER key 89 90 e Delete the order record 1 Touch the ADVANCE_ORDER key the following window is displayed 2 Select the order record and touch the RECORD_DELETE key The confirmation message is displayed To delete the order select YES To cancel the deletion select NO To cancel the operation touch the CANCEL key H Credit customer advance ordering Perform this function to register a credit customer advance order Unlike a customer advance order a credit customer advance order contains the following two numbers customer number and customer related consecutive number The customer number is six digits and the customer related consecutive number is 1 to 10 by default They can be changed to five digits and 1 to 99 respectively by programming To program the setting please consult your authorized SHARP dealer The customer related consecutive number is incremented every time a credit customer advance order is registered e New ordering Procedure 1 Enter the customer code CREDIT ORDER The order record is appeared Skip to the next step 2 If the customer is selected from the list touch the CREDIT_ORDER key without a customer code to display the list Then select the customer and touch the ENTER key The order record is appeared Skip to the next step 2 To cancel the operation touch the CANCEL key
212. me Price PLUOOO23 RARE 0 00 1 HOWCOOK 4 PLU00025 MED RARE 0 00 PLU00027 WELLDONE 0 00 PLU00033 P CHIPS 0 60 4 POTATO End nothing PLU00037 MASHED P 0 60 PLU00038 BAKED P 0 50 PLUOOO40 BUTTER 0 00 5 FLAVOR End nothing PLUOOO41 SOUR CREAM 0 00 213 Table number max 2 digits 1 to 99 Condiment PLU max 30 condiment PLUs 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the ARTICLE button to display the menu and touch the CONDIMENT TABLE button to display the table list 3 Touch or enter the condiment table number and touch the ENTER key to program the table 4 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 4 satisfactorily 5 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter TEXT Message text max 16 characters NEXT LINK TBL Next link condiment table max 2 digits 1 to 99 0 2x2 2x2 size key KEY SIZE VERTICAL DOUBLE Vertical double size key HORIZONTAL DOUBLE Horizontal double size key SINGLE Single size key PLU 01 Condiment PLU 1 5 digits PLU code PRICE LEVEL 1 Price level for condiment PLU 1 0 to 8 PLU 30 Condiment PLU30 5 digits PLU code PRICE LEVEL 30 Price level for condiment PLU 30 0 to 8 214 Promotion table global individual type ARTICLE PROMOTION TABLE PGM2 There are two types
213. ment operations gt VP 71 Key Operation 5 ROOM PLU 00008 PLU 00007 CASH_TOTAL Display ROOMS 0306 2008 7 37 CLERKOOO1 196 50 6 90 100008 196 80 6 80 00007 CASH 20 70 When the room GLU code is selected from the opened room GLU list Key Operation OPENED ROOM Selection of room GLU 5 PLU 00008 PLU 00007 CASH_TOTAL 72 Display ROOFS 0306 2008 7 37 CLERKOOO1 1x6 90 6 90 100008 1x6 80 6 80 PLUOOOO7 CASH 20 70 e Transfer the transaction to room GLU hotel transfer CANCEL To cancel Item entries OPENED_ROOM Select the room GLU code gt ENTER Touch the room GLU code Enter the room GLU code ENTER Room GLU code 1 to 9999 9 IROOM Key Operation Display PLU 00002 UVI PLU 00003 1x2 10 2 10 PLUDOOOZ 135 30 3 30 PLUOOQ03 OPENED ROOM Selection of the room GLU code OPENED ROOM The confirmation window OK CANCEL is displayed select OK to transfer the data 1x2 10 2 10 100002 135 30 3 30 00003 ROOMHG HOTEL TRANS 7 40 H Deposit entries Deposit refers to a prepayment on a guest check It can be received in cash or by check or credit 1 through 9 You can make a deposit entry only when entering a guest check It cannot be done during handling of a tendered amount A received deposit can be refunded by touching
214. minal When you select this mode the window will disappear Touching any key turns the POS terminal ON OP X Z mode This mode allows to take X or Z reports on their sales information It can also be used for employee time function X1 Z1 mode This mode is used to take various daily reports X1 Z1 reports X2 Z2 mode This mode is used to take various weekly or monthly reports X2 Z2 reports PRICE mode This mode allows you to program unit price of PLUs PGM1 mode This mode allows you to program those items which need to be changed often such as unit prices and discount percentages PGM2 mode This mode allows you to program those items which can be programmed in the PGM1 mode and do not require frequent changes such as date time and terminal functions AUTO KEY mode This mode allows you to program AUTO menu keys and automatic sequencing keys SD CARD mode This mode provides data communications between the POS terminal and your personal computer using a SD memory card 15 Mode Selection Selecting a mode Procedure Touch the MODE key The following mode screen is displayed CLERKOOO 1 OPXZ MODE 2 X1 21 MODE 3 2 22 MODE 4 PRICE MODE 8 5 PGM1 MODE 6 PGM2 MODE 7 AUTO KEY MODE 8 SD CARD MODE BACK SPACE Ver1 01 THO0O Select the mode and touch it in the window to operate the desired function When you want to enter the REG mode simply touch the EXIT key
215. ming touch the CANCEL or EXIT key Text Parameter Validation printing text Max 30 characters X 3 lines 273 Bill header text MESSAGE gt BILL TEXT PGM2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the MESSAGE button to display the menu and touch the BILL TEXT button to program details 3 Enter the validation printing text and touch the OK key Repeat this step 3 satisfactorily 4 To terminate the programming touch the CANCEL or EXIT key Text Parameter Bill header text Max 30 characters X 3 lines Bill footer text MESSAGE gt BILL FOOTER PGM2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the MESSAGE button to display the menu and touch the BILL FOOTER button to program details 3 Enter the validation printing text and touch the OK key Repeat this step 3 satisfactorily 4 To terminate the programming touch the CANCEL or EXIT key Text Parameter Bill footer text Max 30 characters X 3 lines 274 Payee name MESSAGE gt PAYEE NAME PGM2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the MESSAGE button to display the menu and touch the PAYEE NAME button to program details 3 Enter the validation printing text and touch the OK key Repeat this step 3 satisfac
216. ming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter RATE Percent rate 0 00 to 100 00 TEXT Description for the service charge Up to 12 characters can be entered 227 Bonus points FUNCTIONS gt BONUS POINT PGM2 You can program up to 10 sets of purchase amounts and bonus points in the bonus point table In the bonus redemption programming you can set the minimum bonus point redeemed bonus points and discount amount for the redeemed bonus points 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the FUNCTIONS button to display the menu and touch the BONUS POINT button to display the program list 3 Touch the BONUS POINT TABLE or BONUS REDEMPTION button to program details 4 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 4 satisfactorily 5 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key BONUS POINT TABLE Text Parameter AMOUNT 1 Amounts for bonus point 1 max 9 digits 0 BONUS POINT1 Bonus points for amount 1 max 7 digits 0 AMOUNT 10 Amounts for bonus point 10 max 9 digits 0 BONUS POINT10 Bonus points for amount 10 max 7 digits 0 BONUS REDEMPTION Text Parameter MINIMUM POINT Minimum bonus point max 7 digits 0 REDEEMED POINTS Bonus points redeemed for the following amount max 7 digits 0 REDEEMED AMOUNT Discoun
217. mode READING DEPARTMENT PLU EAN RANGE PICK UP NEW PICKING LAST PICKING DYNAMIC EAN RANGE PICK UP NEW PICKING LAST PICKING LINK PLU EAN TABLE COMBO MEAL CONDIMENT TABLE EAN PLU CONVERT ITF PLU CONVERT CRATE TABLE PROMOTION TABLE EAN OTHERS PLU INFORMATION PLU MENU KEY SCALE TABLE HAPPY HOUR FUNCTIONS MEDIA TRAINING TEXT CLK CLERK CASHIER MANAGER EMPLOYEE WORKING TIME SHIFT JOB LOCATE TABLE CONTACTLESS KEY OPTIONAL REPORT FUNCTION TEXT FUNCTION KEY FUNCTION MENU KEY DEPT GROUP PLU GROUP PLU HOURLY GROUP MESSAGE TAX AUTO MENU AUTO KEY SEQUENCE CUSTOMER CUSTOMER PROG 195 BRANCHES TRANSFER MASK DEVICE CONFIG DIRECT KEY ONLINE CONFIG INLINE CONFIG MWS CONFIG VMP CONFIG ROM VERSION SETTING ARTICLE DEPARTMENT PLU EAN DYNAMIC EAN PLU RANGE HAPPY HOUR PLU MENU KEY COMBO MEAL LINK PLU EAN TABLE CONDIMENT TABLE PROMOTION TABLE BASIC PRESET OBJECTED ITEM LEVEL1 LEVEL2 LEVEL3 LEVEL4 LEVELS CRATE TABLE EAN PLU CONVERT ITF PLU CONVERT EAN NON PLU PRESS CODE GERMAN TYPE1
218. n is aborted and the POS terminal issues a receipt 1 Make item registrations 2 Touch the SUBTOTAL key 3 Touch the key 4 Touch the SUBTOTAL key Key Operation Display PLU 00002 SUBTOTAL PLUOOOOZ 1x1 00 1 00 SUBTOTAL 00003 SBIL V 2 00 xxxTOTAL 0 00 Yer TOTAL 0 00 Correction of Incorrect Entries Not Handled by the Direct Indirect or Subtotal Void Function Any errors found after the entry of a transaction has been completed or during an amount tendered entry cannot be voided These errors must be handled by the manager The following steps should be taken 1 If you are making the amount tendered entry finalize the transaction 2 Make correct entries from the beginning 3 Hand the incorrect receipt to your manager for its cancellation 129 Special Printing Function Receipt ON OFF The receipt ON printing receipt OFF no receipting status can be toggled by touching the RCPT ONOFF key Receipt ON RCPT_ONOFF Receipt OFF gt RCPT_ONOFF Receipt ON Copy Receipt Printing If your customer wants a receipt after you have finalized a transaction with the receipt ON OFF function in the OFF state no receipting touch the RCPT key Your POS terminal will also print a copy receipt when the receipt ON OFF function is in the ON state Printing a receipt after making the entries shown below with the receipt ON OFF function OFF s
219. n touch the ENTER key e When the amount tendered is short its equivalent in deficit is shown in domestic currency e Change amount will be displayed in domestic currency e Availability of credit and check tendering depends on the programming Only for the exchange 1 Case of opening foreign currency drawer e At the time of issuing receipt after tendering exchange amount e At the time of issuing X Z report included CCD e The Exchange drawer open function is executed When the EXCH n key is touched the foreign currency drawer will be opened exchange rate 1 550220 EXCH1 Key Operation Display PLU 00002 PLU 00003 1x46 50 46 50 EXCH1 00003 Amount tendered in foreign currency 12000 CASH_TOTAL EXCHI 1 990220 US 107 74 CASH US 120 00 CHANGE 7 90 CHANGE 7 90 101 H Received on account entries To receive a received on account RA you can select either of cash only system or mixed tendering system Select the cash only system when you receive RA by cash only In the mixed tendering system you can receive RA by cash check or credit In either system you cannot receive RA in foreign currency When you want to use the cash only system contact with your authorized SHARP dealer e Mixed tendering system RA amount max 8 digits RA or RA2 Discount amount ESS n 1 Discount rate n CASH_TOTAL T
220. nagement function enter the customer code assigned to a customer You can enter the customer code at any point during a transaction Normally customer information name code and address are previously set by the programming However you can enter a new customer information during transaction When an undefined customer code is entered the message UNDEFINED CODE is displayed then you can enter the customer s name and address which are saved in the customer file For the customer registered you can defer his her payment Take the tentative finalization using the charge key The sales amount is accumulated to the charge amount of each customer When the customer settles his her charge account take the received on account entry lt Look up of the customer code gt Procedure e Direct entry of the customer code Reading the customer card by card reader Customer code max 13 digits gt CUSTOMER If the customer code is not found in the file the message UNDEFINED CODE is displayed then the window is displayed to enter a new customer record Entry from the window 1 Touch the CUSTOMER key the following window is displayed CUSTOMER CODE 2 Enter the customer code and touch the ENTER key or scanning the customer code f the customer code is not found in the file the message UNDEFINED CODE is displayed then the window is displayed to enter a new customer record If you want to search t
221. ncing keys M Auto menu programming Procedure 1 Select the AUTO KEY mode and touch the AUTO MENU button to display the auto menu list AUTO MENU to AUTO MENU6 2 Select the auto menu key from the list the selection window TITLE PRESET KEY CONTENT PRESET is displayed TITLE PRESET To program the title text for each auto menu Text Parameter TITLE PRESET Max 16 characters KEY CONTENT PRESET To program auto keys for each auto menu Select the auto key position 1 to 15 the auto key list is displayed and select the auto key to assign Select the INHIBIT to delete the auto key from each auto menu Text Parameter Auto key 1 Auto menu key n Auto key 15 3 To finish the programming touch the EXIT key Auto key sequence programming Procedure 1 Select the AUTO KEY mode and touch the AUTO KEY SEQUENCE button to display the auto key list AUTO to AUTO99 2 Select the auto key from the list to program key sequence 3 Program the key sequence from DEPT PLU FUNC KEY list To delete the step of key sequence touch the RECORD DELETE button 4 To finish the programming touch the EXIT key 5 The confirmation window is displayed Select the operation from 1 SAVE 2 ABANDON 3 CANCEL menu 294 Reading of Stored Programs You can read programs stored in the PGM1 or PGM2 mode Procedure 1 Select the menu READING in the PGM1 or PGM2 m
222. ncodes the total amount of the sales or the amounts of each department sales The transaction must be finalized with the CASH2 key For details please contact your authorized SHARP dealer eu Key Operation Print PLU 00001 X 2 0 000021 PLUOQQO1 ICASH2 1x 5 00 5 00 1000002 CASH X7 2000010007509 132 Entertainment Bill This function is used to print sales data on guest checks Entertainment bill on a receipt printer Procedure gt E BILL gt Print sample SHARP BILL NUMBER 4 22 10 2008 0001 CLERKOOO1 0293 15 46 1x 10 00 10 00 PLUO0001 Ch x10 00 Angaben 0 zum Nachweis der Hohe und der betrieblichen Veranlassung von Bewirtungsaufwendungen Anlass der Bewirtung 00 bei Bewirtung im Restaurant anderen Fallen Ort Datum TOWNNAMETOWNNAME 22 10 2008 Unterschrift 133 Type of Receipt You can select one of the following five types of receipts These types of receipts are available for the transaction receipt By default the addition receipt type is selected e Addition receipt type e Single double receipt type e Addition single receipt type e Double addition receipt type e Double addition single receipt type You can shift the printing mode of items for the receipt by touching the RCPT SHIFT key before item entry Receipt Shift function RCPT SHIFT shift to addition
223. ned on the latter will automatically be signed off e f you want to enter a clerk code before every transaction consult your authorized SHARP dealer e Your POS terminal can provide the clerk cashier system instead of current system clerk only system If you want to change the system please consult your authorized SHARP dealer Cashier assignment Clerk cashier system lt Sign on operation gt Procedure 1 Cashier code max 4 digits gt CSR Sign On or touching the CSR n key 2 Entering the password if required 3 Entering the drawer number if required lt Sign off operation gt After each transaction the cashier will be signed off automatically if the terminal has been programmed for the cashier code entry as automatic cashier sign off mode If the terminal is not programmed to require a cashier code to be entered for each transaction operation cashier stay down mode transaction operations are continued with the same cashier code the cashier code does not need to be re entered In this case touch the CSR to sign off Procedure gt CSR 26 Item Selection from the Menu Your POS terminal allows you to select PLU items functions auto keys from a menu For example if you want to enter the function from a menu touch the corresponding menu key to display the menu and touch the function key lt Example gt e PLU menu PLU menu01 Touch the PLU MENUO1 key the following wind
224. nge 9 DOM CUR9 Domestic currency 9 xxCID Cash in drawer CH ID Check in drawer CA CH ID Cash check in drawer CHK CG Check change TICKET Ticket NBAL GLU NBAL GLU NBAL ROOM GLU NBAL ROOM GLU DEPARTMENT Department printing PLU PLU printing EAN D EAN EAN Dynamic EAN printing SKIP NOT SKIP 268 H Department report format REPORT gt DEPT RPT FORMAT 2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the REPORT button to display the menu and touch the DEPT RPT FORMAT button to program details 3 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 3 satisfactorily 4 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter SKIP NOT SKIP CUSTOMER COUNTER Hourly report REPORT HOURLY REPORT PGM2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the REPORT button to display the menu and touch the HOURLY REPORT button to program details 3 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 3 satisfactorily 4 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter Memory type 15MIN 15 minute type 30MIN 30 minute type 60MIN 60 minute type START TIME Starting time max 2 digits 0 to 23 MEMORY TYPE
225. nly in the MGR mode PUBLIC Allowed in the REG and MGR modes DISABLE Disables GLU finalization after ordering GEU FINALIZE ENABLE Enables GLU finalization after ordering VIP SALES LIMITED Allowed only in the MGR mode PUBLIC Allowed in the REG and MGR modes LIMITED Allowed only in the MGR mode WASTE MODE PUBLIC Allowed in the REG and MGR modes INTERMEDIATE FINAL DISABLE Disables GLU finalization before intermediate GLU reading ENABLE Enables GLU finalization before intermediate GLU reading OPEN GLU DISPLAY NORMAL GLU ROOM GLU DISABLE EAN LEARNING DISABLE Disables EAN learning function ENABLE Enables EAN learning function PRICE CHANGE LIMITED Allowed only in the MGR mode PUBLIC Allowed in the REG and MGR modes CUSTOMER LEARNING LIMITED Allowed only in the MGR mode PUBLIC Allowed in the REG and MGR modes CUSTOMER BILL DISABLE Disables customer bill printing ENABLE Enables customer bill printing CUSTOMER BILL DEL DISABLE Disables customer bill deletion ENABLE Enables customer bill deletion FINALIZE ST 0 LIMITED Allows finalization when the subtotal is 0 only in the MGR mode PUBLIC Allows finalization when the subtotal is 0 in the REG and MGR modes To be continued 253 0 RECEIPT DRAWER DISABLE ENABLE Disables drawer opening when the sales amount printed on the receipt is 0 Enables drawe
226. normal PLU EAN entries When a Combo meal PLU EAN is entered the labels of those PLUs tied to the Combo PLU EAN are printed automatically The sum of all adjusted prices of those PLUs tied to the Combo PLU becomes the combo price setting em Key Operation Display PLU 00011 CASH TOTAL 1x6 60 6 60 00011 00031 PLUOO032 PLUOOO33 CASH 6 60 6 60 When combo meal is registered q ty totalizer of the combo PLU EAN and amount totalizer of each tied PLU are updated 49 H With without entries This function is used to add delete tied PLU s to from a Combo PLU EAN The with without function is used to change the tied PLUs of the combo PLU EAN in compliance with a special request made by a guest or to meet other situations The following two types are available With This entry adds one of the tied PLUs to combo PLU EAN WITH PLU code PLU EAN gt WITH gt Direct PLU key gt Without This entry deletes one of the tied PLUs from combo PLU EAN WITHOUT gt PLU code gt PLU EAN gt WITHOUT gt Direct PLU key gt Procedure 1 Touch the WITH or WITHOUT key and enter a tied PLU to add delete Repeat this step 1 to modify tied PLUs of the combo PLU EAN The with and without operation is allowed a total of 20 times 2 Enter the combo PLU EAN item eum Key Operation Display WITH PLU 00008 xx WITHOUT 32 PLU EAN 146 60 6 60 Combo PLU
227. not connect TCP IP connection 1 5 RS232 connection channel ER 01PU TM T90 PRINTER TM H6000 TM T88 3 T88 4 42 digits TM U200 230 40 digits NO Disables auto cutter YES Enables auto cutter CHANNEL AUTO CUTTER Select the type of receipt print formats ADDITION Addition S D Single Double ADD S X Addition Single D ADD Double addition D ADD S Double addition Single You can assign a second remote printer to which data should be output when the first SECOND KP remote printer encounters an error during transmission of the data Second remote printer number 0 to 9 PRINT TYPE NAME Description for the remote printer max 12 characters INITIAL FEED Initial line feed for a remote printer 0 to 64 Sort receipt cutting between each sort group SORT RCPT CUTTING YES Enables sort receipt cutting NO Disables sort receipt cutting Sequential print from sort group 1 except header and footer SEQUENTIAL PRINT YES Enables sequential print NO Disables sequential print 281 BCR SCANNER DEVICE CONFIG gt BCR SCANNER 2 1 Select the PGM2 mode touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the DEVICE CONFIG button to display the menu and touch the BCR SCANNER button to program details 3 Select the required programming item and enter or select each parameter then touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 3
228. o x xPBAL 23 00 DEPOSIT 50 00 Total DEPO 10 00 178 Room GLU report Room GLU report by clerk IK 1 When you take 2 report Z1 is printed instead of X1 ROOK GLU Room GLU code 1 9999 Range ROOK 1 e 000 1 mm Clerk code xPBAL 10 80 PBAL DEPOSIT 0 00 Deposit total DEPO 30 00 Deposit total 0001 iP BAL x30 50 DEPOSIT 0 00 DEPO x 00 indicates that the transaction was handled by a TOTAL clerk under training 4PBAL 41 30 DEPOSIT 0 00 Total DEPO 40 00 eX 1 When you take a Z report Z1 is printed instead of X1 ROOM GLU BY CLERK Clerk code CLKFOOO 1 CLERK0001 Clerk name ROOK 1 Room GLU code 10 80 PBAL DEPOSIT 0 00 Deposit total DEPO 0 00 Deposit total ROOM P BAL 30 50 DEPOSIT 0 00 DEPO 00 TOTAL 41 30 DEPOSIT 0 00 Total DEPO 0 00 179 H Balance report x 1 BALANCE OLD BAL 97 00 ORDER TL 24643 62 PAID TL 24539 12 BALANCE 201 50 H Bill report K 1 BILL 0001 0001 03 04 2008 13 70 0002 0001 03 04 2008 17 40 0003 0001 03 04 2008 19 60 0004 0001 03 04 2008 20 60 0005 0001 03 04 2008 20 60 0006 0001 03 04 2008
229. o cancel RA operation To correct overwrite RA amount CHECK through CHECK5 gt Multiplication gt X QTY tendered cour through CASH5 gt CREDIT1 through CREDIT9 Of the CREDIT1 through CREDIT9 keys you may use only the one that is programmed to be capable of entering amounts tendered Key Operation Display 1234567 0001 4500 RA 0000000001234567 500 CREDIT 1 45 00 4000 CASH_TOTAL CREDITI 5 00 CASH 40 00 CHANGE 0 00 CHANGE 102 e Cash only system Procedure RA amount max 8 digits RA or RA2 Key Operation 1234567 4500 RA Display 1001 0000000001234567 ERA 45 00 TOTAL 45 00 103 H Paid out entries To make a paid out PO entry you can select either of cash only system or mixed tendering system Select the cash only system when you make a payment by cash only In the mixed tendering system you can make a payment by cash check or credit In either system you must a PO entry only in a transaction When you want to use the cash only system contact with your authorized SHARP dealer e Mixed media type For the next PO PO or PO2 1 Amount max 8 digits CASH TOTAL through CASH5 i PO or PO2 utere through CHECK5 CREDIT1 through CREDIT9 To cancel Of the CREDIT1 through CREDIT9 keys you may use only the one that is pr
230. oading The programming data can be loaded from the SD card Procedure 1 Select the LOADING menu in the SD CARD mode the following data list window is displayed Text Data list INDIVIDUAL PROGRAMMING DATA Select the individual programming data DEPARTMENT PLU EAN DYNAMIC EAN PLU MENU KEY LINK PLU TABLE CONDIMENT TABLE PLU CONVERT CRATE TABLE PROMOTION TABLE COMBO MEAL EAN NON PLU PRESS CODE PLU INFORMATION TRANSACTION TRAINING TEXT CLK CLERK CASHIER MANAGER OTHER PRESET DIRECT KEY FUNCTION MENU FUNCTION KEY MESSAGE DEVICE CONFIG TAX CUSTOMER VMP ID ALL PROGRAMMING DATA All programming data CUSTOMER NAME LIST Customer name list 2 Select the data menu from the list the confirmation window is displayed To load the programming data file touch the OK key To cancel the operation touch the CANCEL key 325 12 European Article Number EAN or Universal Product Code UPC H EAN or UPC code Your machine can transact the following codes e UPC A Number system character 0 2 3 4 UPC E eEAN 8 13 Internal code EAN 8 EAN 13 For the codes used in store marking there are two types of PLU type treated as a code like PLU code and Non PLU type price quantity information is included in the code When a code is non PLU type the price quantity in the code is read for sales entry in case of quantity quantity multiplys preset unit pr
231. ode Note the mode indication on the display 3 Repeat the entries that are recorded on the incorrect receipt All data on the incorrect receipt is removed from POS terminal memory the voided amounts are added to the void mode totalizer Your POS terminal leaves the VOID mode whenever a transaction is cancelled i e finalized in the VOID mode To void additional transactions repeat steps 2 and 3 above Incorrect receipt Cancellation receipt 00000080307 22 10 2008 15 56 00000080308 22 10 2008 15 57 0001 CLERK00O1 0001 CLERKOOO1 1x 1 25 1 25 VOID 00001 1 1 25 4 05 ere PLUOOOO1 1x 15 00 5 ED ee oye PLU00002 1x 15 00 15 00 PLU00002 CASH 16 25 CASH 16 25 142 Reading X and Resetting Z of Sales Totals e Use the reading function X when you need to take the reading of sales information entered after the last resetting You can take this reading any number of times It does not affect the POS terminal s memory e Use the resetting function Z when you need to clear the POS terminal s memory Resetting prints all sales information and clears the entire memory except for the GT1 through GT3 reset count and consecutive number e X1 and 71 reports show daily sales information You can take these reports in the X1 Z1 mode e X2 and Z2 reports show periodic monthly consolidation information You can take these reports in the X2 Z2 mode e In the OPXZ mode a clerk and
232. ode CUSTOMER saLgs2 Customer sales report 2 22 The range be specified by Detail amount amp total entering start and end codes CUSTOMER BY AMT Customer sales report by X2 Customer sales range specified sales range Customer charge account CHARGE ACCOUNT report Customer no x2 payment report 145 Operating modes Report Description 2 1 21 X2 Z2 Data to entered Remarks Customer ordering report eade by specified 2 22 The range can be specified by CUSTOMER y SP g entering start and end codes ORDERING Customer ordering report Dale by specified date range X2 Z2 The range can be specified by entering start and end date STACKED REPORT 1 21 2 72 Stacked report 2 i E JOURNAL Electronic journal XZ X1 Z1 e You can pick PLU EAN codes for issuing the report You can pick up new PLU EAN codes or the codes that were picked up the last time To pick up new codes select NEW PICKING then enter the required PLU EAN codes and touch the CONTINUE button to accept the new list To pick up the codes that were picked up last time select LAST PICKING e The following reports relating to PLU EAN is issued in the sequence of PLUs and EANS PLU PLU BY DEPT PLU IND GROUP PLU ZERO SALES PLU STOCK PLU MINIMUM STOCK and PLU PRICE CATEGORY Also the EAN codes
233. ode the job menu window is displayed 2 Select the required reading menu the output device selection window is displayed Select the output device DISPLAY PRINT To cancel the operation select CANCEL 3 To finish the operation touch the EXIT key PGM reading jobs H PGM1 mode READING DEPARTMENT PLU EAN RANGE PICK UP NEW PICKING LAST PICKING DYNAMIC EAN RANGE PICK UP NEW PICKING LAST PICKING FUNCTIONS CLERK CASHIER H PGM2 mode READING DEPARTMENT PLU EAN RANGE PICK UP NEW PICKING LAST PICKING DYNAMIC EAN RANGE PICK UP NEW PICKING LAST PICKING LINK PLU EAN TABLE COMBO MEAL CONDIMENT TABLE EAN PLU CONVERT ITF PLU CONVERT CRATE TABLE 295 PROMOTION TABLE EAN OTHERS PLU INFORMATION PLU MENU KEY SCALE TABLE HAPPY HOUR FUNCTIONS MEDIA TRAINING TEXT CLK CLERK CASHIER MANAGER EMPLOYEE WORKING TIME SHIFT JOB LOCATE TABLE CONTACTLESS KEY OPTIONAL REPORT FUNCTION TEXT FUNCTION KEY FUNCTION MENU KEY DEPT GROUP PLU GROUP PLU HOURLY GROUP MESSAGE TAX AUTO MENU AUTO KEY SEQUENCE CUSTOMER CUSTOMER PROG BRANCHES TRANSFER MASK DEVICE CONFIG DIRECT KEY ONLINE CONFIG INLINE CO
234. ogrammed to be capable of entering amounts tendered em Key Operation Display 12345 PO 0000000000012345 3500 CASH_TOTAL 35 00 35 00 35 00 e Cash only system Amount max 8 digits PO or PO2 em Key Operation Display 123008 1500 PO 0000000000123008 15 00 15 00 104 H No sale exchange Simply touch the NO SALE key without any entry The drawer will be opened and the text of no sale will be printed When the no sale function is programmed to complex key type touch the CASH TOTAL key instead of the NO SALE key Example Key Operation Display NO SALE NO SALE 0 00 Transferring cash This function is used to change cash sales amount for credit or check sales amount For example you can use this function when your guest asks you to credit the payment or to receive payment with check after entering the payment as cash Procedure Amount max 8 digits CHECK 1 through CHECK 5 CREDIT 1 through CREDIT 9 em Key Operation Display 2000 CREDIT 1 TRANSFER CREDITI 20 00 20 00 105 H Cashing a check To use this function please consult your authorized SHARP dealer while you cannot use this function together with the cash transferring function Check amount CHECK 1 through CHECK 5 Example Key Operation Display 435678
235. on to display the menu and touch the COMBO MEAL button to display the table list 3 Touch or enter the combo meal table number and touch the ENTER key to program the combo meal table 4 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 4 satisfactorily 5 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter COMBO PLU1 Tied PLU code max 5 digits PRICE Unit price of each combo menu max 6 digits COMBO PLU10 Tied PLU code max 5 digits PRICE Unit price of each combo menu max 6 digits Link PLU EAN table ARTICLE LINK PLU EAN TABLE PGM2 Table number max 2 digits 1 to 99 Linked PLU EAN max 30 PLUs EANs 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the ARTICLE button to display the menu and touch the LINK PLU EAN TABLE button to display the table list 3 Touch or enter the link table number and touch the ENTER key to program the link PLU EAN table 4 Touch the required programming item and enter PLU EAN code and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 4 satisfactorily 5 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter LINK PLU EAN 1 Linked PLU code max 5 digits or EAN code max 8 13 digits LINK PLU EAN 30 Linked PLU code max 5 digits or EAN code max 8 13 digits 212
236. or cashier can take his or her report e f you want to stop the printing report touch the CANCEL key Even if the printing is stopped the consecutive number and Z counter if you are printing a Z report is increased by one Only when clerk cashier system is applied to your machine you can take both of Clerk and Cashier reports How to take a reading X1 X2 OPX or resetting 21 72 or OPZ report To take a reading X1 X2 or OPX report 1 Select X1 X2 or OPX MODE in the mode menu window to display the report list 2 Select a report from the table shown on the next page 3 If needed enter corresponding values described in the Data to be entered column on the table shown later 4 Select a device DISPLAY or PRINT to receive the output To take a resetting Z1 Z2 or OPZ report 1 Select Z1 Z2 or OPZ MODE in the mode menu window to display the report list 2 Select a report from the table shown on the next page 3 If needed enter corresponding values described in the Data to be entered column on the table shown later H Flash report You can take flash reports display only in the X1 mode for department sales cash in drawer CID and sales total at the point you take the report 1 Select FLASH in the X1 Z1 mode menu window to display the items list 2 Select DEPT SALES to take a flash report of department sales CI
237. ot Repeat this step 5 satisfactorily 6 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter PRICE Unit price max 6 digits GROUP No 01 09 Plus department 10 Minus department 11 Plus hash department 12 Minus hash department 13 Plus bottle return department 14 Minus bottle return department 15 17 Non turnover 1 3 DESCRIPT Description for a department Up to 20 characters can be entered DPT X X KEY TEXT Description for a dept key Up to 16 characters can be displayed DPT X X KEY COLOR 232 colors Fore color Back color BLACK BLUE ENTRY TYPE Type of unit price entry for departments OPEN amp PRESET Open amp preset PRESET Preset only OPEN Open only INHIBIT Inhibited COMMISSION No Commission group number 1 through 9 If the number 0 is entered no commission group number will be assigned to a department OUTPUT KP No 1 ID number of the network remote printer 1 1 through 9 If the number 0 is entered no remote printer will operate OUTPUT KP No 2 ID number of the network remote printer 2 1 through 9 If the number 0 is entered no remote printer will operate RECEIPT PRINT YES Prints the department sales information on the receipt NO Prints nothing on the receipt SIF SICS NORMAL Department type selection SIF SIF department SICS SICS department NORMAL Department other than SI
238. ow is displayed Menu title ae NBAL ET T OPENED pl BILL ROOH MODE e UP 3515V 21 39 11 Select the required item from the menu window e Function menu Function menu03 Touch the FUNC MENU03 key the following window is displayed Menu title E gt gt S 5 GLU E Li ei EI NBAL E CLKO2 CLKO3 CLKO4 CLKOS AUTO MENUO3 Select the required function key from the menu window 21 39 27 27 Starting Cash Memory Entry If you enter the amount of currency for the starting amount in the drawer before entry operations you can separate that amount from the sales amount when reports are generated Your POS terminal can be programmed to enforce the entry of starting cash into memory Procedure 1 Touch the OPXZ mode to display the SCM job menu screen BM NIIT OPXZ MODE 1 READING 9 SYSTEM READING 2 RESETTING 10 SYSTEM RESETTING 3 EMPLOYEE BACK SPACE iu eal m 8 CLOSE STORE EXIT 16 06 08 m Ei 2 Touch the SCM or SCM key to open the drawer and to display the SCM entry window e Select the money type by touching item or using the ENTER key e Enter quantities of money and touch the ENTER key To terminate the entry touch the E
239. oyee card XXXX Secret code gt ENTER LA gt EMPL Employee code max 10 digits ENTER Employee code max 10 digits EMPL 115 H Employee s working time recording You can manage the number of hours for which employees work The working time can be recorded by the following operations e Time in out and break in out operations The POS terminal allows a clerk to sign on or off without checking the clerk s time in or out Procedure e Time in 1 Touch the TIME_IN key The following window is displayed to enter the employee code 2 Enter the employee code max 10 digits and touch the ENTER key or read the employee card 3 If the secret code is requested enter the secret code and touch the ENTER key in the following window 4 If the job location entry is requested select the job location in the following window SELECT LOCATION LOCATION1 LOCATION2 116 5 Enter or select the clerk code in the following window If the clerk is not assigned enter O as a code m ans 7 If the drawer selection window is displayed select the drawer or none e Time out 1 Touch the TIME_OUT key The following window is displayed to enter the employee code 2 Enter the employee code max 10 digits and touch the ENTER key or read the employee card 3 If the secret code is requested enter the secret code and touch the E
240. pe Yes no Tare table no PLU information table no Commission group Hourly group AE yo e Cc KITE 71 0 TO 0000 04000 KPOOI M 0 00 56 0 40012312345678 02 Non accessed EAN delete method PI ITEMOG 10 Non delete space Delete in the 0 00 Z1 mode P2 3 20 0 00 P3 3 30 0 00 BLACK YELLOW 10000000000 HI11111111 1 0 TO 0000 0 HGO 00 KPODI 0 000 5 51 000 Dynamic EAN PGM2 mode 3PGM2 DYNAMIC EAN Report type 40015263478938 0 1 00 0 coo 001002 P1 DPT O1 10 0 00 P2 0 00 0 00 P3 0 00 0 00 BLACK YELLOM 00000000000 H111111111 1 0 TO CO HGO 00 001 Link PLU table PGM2 mode PGH2 LINK PLU EAN TABLE Report type Link PLU table no 0 1 e P00040 T Assigned PLU codes 02 P 00050 00054 299 Combo meal PGM2 mode 2 PG COMBO HEAL Report type P 00024 P 00025 P 00026 P 00027 P 00028 P00029 01 02 oua med 5 OFT oe lt gt gt Combo meal Assigned PLU codes and prices Condiment table PGM2 mode Report type Condiment table no PLU codes Linked condiment table no PGN2 CONDIMENT TABLE 801 00023 P1 P 00025 P1 00027 P1 HOWCOOK 04 04 P 00033 P1 P 00037 P1 00038 PI POTATO 05 0 0004
241. pecified check key is used YES Enables footer printing on the receipt NO Disables footer printing on the receipt NAME amp ADDRESS Threshold amount to prompt the name and address entry max 8 digits 0 to 99999999 AMOUNT ENTRY You may select compulsory or non compulsory amount tender COMPULSORY Compulsory amount tendered entry NON COMPULSORY Non compulsory amount tendered entry You can make the non add code entry compulsory when a check entry is accepted NON ADD COMPULSORY Compulsory non add code entry NON COMPULSORY Non compulsory non add code entry EFT COMPULSORY Makes EFT function compulsory NON COMPULSORY Makes EFT function non compulsory DRAWER OPEN YES Opens the drawer NO Disables the drawer opening Either change enable or disable can be selected for each check key CHANGE DUE DISABLE Disables change calculation ENABLE Enables change calculation DESCRIPTOR Currency descriptor Up to 4 characters can be entered VP COMPULSORY Compulsory validation printing NON COMPULSORY Non compulsory validation printing Change selection CHANGE SELECT BY TICKET BY CASH Retention on closed transaction file CLOSED TRANSACTION RETAINED NO RETAINED 230 Credit key MEDIA gt CREDIT 2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the MEDIA button to display the menu and touch the CRE
242. played Once you set the time the internal clock unit will continue to run as long as the built in battery pack is charged and also update the date day month year properly 252 Function prohibition OPTIONAL gt FUNCTION PROHIBIT 2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the OPTIONAL button to display the menu and touch the FUNCTION PROHIBIT button to program details 3 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 3 satisfactorily 4 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter OPX Z REPORT DISABLE Disables clerk report printing in the OPXZ mode ENABLE Enables clerk report printing in the OPXZ mode PAID OUT LIMITED Allowed only in the MGR mode PUBLIC Allowed in the REG and MGR modes REFUND RETURN LIMITED Allowed only in the MGR mode PUBLIC Allowed in the REG and MGR modes ISSUE ITEM VOID LIMITED Allowed only in the MGR mode PUBLIC Allowed in the REG and MGR modes NO ISSUED VOID LIMITED Allowed only in the MGR mode PUBLIC Allowed in the REG and MGR modes SBTL VOID LIMITED Allowed only in the MGR mode PUBLIC Allowed in the REG and MGR modes ITEM VP DISABLE Disables item validation printing ENABLE Enables item validation printing INTERMEDIATE GLU LIMITED Allowed o
243. printed on the receipt or the slip Procedure 1 Touch the INTER MED key The following window is displayed INTERMEDIATE GLU Po RECEIPT REPORT PRINTER 2 Select the GLU type normal GLU or room GLU Enter the GLU or select the GLU from the opened GLU list by touching the LIST key Select the output printer receipt printer or bill printer 3 Touch the ENTER or CONTINUE key to perform printing To cancel the operation touch the CANCEL key This function is available after finishing the guest check entry 77 H Bill totalizing bill transfer e Bill totalizing The bill totalizing function is used to totalize multiple bills when for example a particular guest pays not only his or her bill but also the bills of other guests Procedure tae pe 1 gt Select the GLU code ENTER pe 1 gt Touch the GLU code L Enter the GLU code ENTER gt Enter the GLU code GLU 2 2 2 gt OPENED GLU Select the GLU code W A gt or iE Touch the GLU code __ Payment operation L Enter the GLU code gt ENTER i gt Enter the GLU code GLU NOTE e 1 bill and 2 bills are merged into one bill The GLU code on the merged bill is determined by th
244. r opening when the sales amount printed on the receipt is 0 VOID AFTER ST KEY LIMITED PUBLIC Allows void operation after the subtotal key is touched only in the MGR mode Allows void operation after the subtotal key is touched in the REG and MGR modes DRAWER OPEN X1 X2 DISABLE ENABLE Disables drawer opening in the X1 X2 mode Enables drawer opening in the X1 X2 mode DRAWER OPEN 21 22 DISABLE ENABLE Disables drawer opening in the Z1 Z2 mode Enables drawer opening in the Z1 Z2 mode DRAWER OPEN OP X Z DISABLE ENABLE Disables drawer opening in the OPXZ mode Enables drawer opening in the OPXZ mode 254 Function selection 1 OPTIONAL FUNCTION SELECTI 2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the OPTIONAL button to display the menu and touch the FUNCTION SELECT1 button to program details 3 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 3 satisfactorily 4 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter REFUND VP COMPULSORY Compulsory refund validation printing NON COMPULSORY Non compulsory refund validation printing VP COMPULSORY Compulsory minus validation printing NON COMPULSORY Non compulsory minus validation printing DOUBLE RCPT HEADER 1 LINE Prints a one line head
245. re downloaded to the POS terminal from the back office On the POS terminal you open the mask data confirm the order proposals and enter the quantities for the articles The mask data is uploaded online using a computer e Universal masks Universal masks enable you to send information such as merchandise returns inventories etc to the headquarters Mask no 6 to 25 are reserved for universal masks The mask data article codes and texts are downloaded to the POS terminal from the headquarters On the POS terminal you enter information such as the quantities of returns inventories etc into the mask data The mask data is uploaded online using a computer One of the universal masks can also be utilized as branch to branch stock transfer To use this function you need to specify the mask no to be used as stock transfer in the PGM2 mode Mask no gt MASK gt Date entry If the mask is selected from the list touch the MASK key without a mask no to display the list Select the mask no and touch the ENTER key The procedure skips to the date entry To cancel the operation touch the CANCEL key 94 Auxiliary Entries Percent calculations Yo premium or Yo discount Your POS terminal provides percent calculations for a merchandise subtotal or each item entry You need to program in advance for which merchandise subtotal or which item entry your POS terminal should perform a percent calculation For percent cal
246. report XZ X1 Z1 2 22 Only for the clerk cashier system Employee code EMPLOYEE Employee report 2 22 The range can be specified by entering start and end codes Employee code EMP ADJUSTMENT Employee time X2 The range can be specified by adjustment report entering start and end codes Employee active status Employee code EMP ACTIVE STATUS X2 The range can be specified by report entering start and end codes Employee over time Employ e code EMP OVER TIME X2 Z2 The range can be specified by report entering start and end codes lt Others gt Hourly report x1 F individual ti Gout by specified range or an individual time range Hourly report all 1 71 DAILY Daily net report 2 72 LABOR COST Labor cost report x1 GLU code GLU GLU report 1 21 range be specified by entering start and end codes GLU BY CLERK GLU report by clerk 1 71 Room GLU code ROOM GLU Room GLU report 1 21 range be specified by entering start and end codes ROOM GLU BY CLERK Room GLU report by clerk 1 21 BALANCE Balance report x1 x2 BILL Bill report 1 71 Customer code CUSTOMER SALES Customer sales report X2 The range can be specified by entering start and end codes Customer sales report 1 Eustoman Gode CUSTOMER SALES1 22 The range can be specified by Only details f entering start and end codes Customer c
247. ries according to the combination of its sign and the SIGN sign of its associated department as follows Department PLU EAN Serves as a normal plus PLU EAN Department PLU EAN Serves as a normal minus PLU EAN Department PLU EAN Accepts store coupon entries but not split pricing entries Department PLU EAN Not valid not accepted PRICE1 Unit price of price level 1 max 6 digits PRICE8 Unit price of price level 8 max 6 digits BASE QTY Base quantity for each PLU EAN that should be applied only to split pricing entries max 2 digits 0 to 99 TEXT Description for a PLU EAN for price level 1 PLUXXXXX Up to 16 or 20 characters can be entered TEXT8 Description for a PLU EAN for price level 8 space Up to 16 or 20 characters can be entered Description for a touch key XXXXX or space for EAN KEY TEXT Up to 16 characters can be displayed KEY COLOR 232 colors Fore color Back color BLACK YELLOW OPEN Open price only INHIBIT Inhibited ENTRY TYPE OPEN amp PRESET Open price and preset price PRESET Preset price only For EAN it is fixed to PRESET COMBO Combo PLU EAN MENU TYPE LINK Link PLU EAN NORMAL Normal PLU EAN COMBO LINK Table number for combo PLU EANS link PLUs 1 through 99 0 CONDIMENT TBL Table number for condiment entry 01 through 99 00 For EAN it is fixed to 00 CONDIMENT TYPE YES Condiment type NO Non condiment type
248. rking time shift at the time in operation e The employee can make operations only at the assigned working time shift e If you program the POS terminal to require a CCD entry at the working time shift operation the CCD entry window is displayed e You can also program the POS terminal to allow the employee to make a CCD entry anytime after the working time shift operation In this case the message CCD IS NOT DONE appears to remind you to complete the CCD entry if the employee makes a time out operation without completing the CCD entry when the woking time is shifted 120 Customer Relation Management Group discount entries The terminal provides the percent calculation discount premium for associated group Percentage 0 01 to 100 00 programmed rate e Display of the group discountable subtotal Procedure GR DISC SHIFT n gt SUBTOTAL e Group discount entry Procedure When you use a programmed rate Display of the group discountable subtotal Group discount rate EN GROUP DISC n e Group discount status shift The terminal allows you to shift the programmed group discount status of each item by touching the GR DISC SHIFT n key before or after item entries After each entry is completed the programmed group discount status of each item is resumed Procedure GR DISC_SHIFT n gt Item entry Key Operation Display PLU 00002 I m GR DISC_SHIFT 1 PLU 00003 n
249. rn VPCNT Validation counter BILL CNT Bill print counter NOSALE No sale PBAL PBAL seek NBAL NBAL SKIP NOT SKIP G C CNT Guest check counter SKIP NOT SKIP GUEST Guest counter ORDER TL Order total PAID TL Paid total AVE Average paid total guest 263 Text Classification Parameter O P Difference order total paid total VIP SALES1 VIP1 sale VIP SALES2 VIP2 sale VIP SALES3 VIP3 sale TRANS OUT Transfer out TRANS IN Transfer in BILL BAL Transfer out transfer in SCM Starting cash memory SCM Starting cash memory SCM TTL Starting cash memory total Received on account 2 Received on account2 RA Discount for received on account RA Percent calculation for received on account PO Paid out 2 Paid out2 CA CHK Cash check operation DEPOSIT Deposit DEPO Deposit CASH TIP Cash tip NOCA TIP Non cash tip TIP PAID Tip paid H TRANS Hotel transfer CASH Cash CASH2 Cash2 CASH3 Cash3 CASH4 Cash4 CASH5 Cash5 CHECK Check CHECK2 Check2 CHECK3 Check3 CHECK4 Check4 CHECK5 Check5 CREDIT1 Credit1 CREDIT2 Credit2 CREDIT3 Credit3 CREDIT4 Credit4 CREDIT5 Credit5 CREDIT6 Credit6 CREDIT7 Credit7 CREDIT8 Credit8 CREDIT9 Credit9 CHARGE Charge SKIP NOT SKIP 264
250. rogramming 2 Touch the PERSONNEL button to display the menu and touch the CONTACTLESS KEY button to program the contact less key 3 Set the contact less key to define the programming window is displayed to assign a clerk code 4 Enter the clerk code to assign Text Parameter CLERK CODE Clerk code max 4 digits 0001 to 9999 The entry of 0 disables the use of contact less clerk keys 5 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key When the EXIT key is touched in the programming window the confirmation window of the clerk code name is displayed When you confirm a clerk code and clerk name for each contact less clerk key perform the program reading sequence CONTACTLESS KEY in the PGM2 mode Prohibition of the contact less key PERSONNEL CLERK KEY DEL PGM2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the PERSONNEL button to display the menu and touch the CLERK KEY DEL button to delete the contact less key The programming window is displayed to delete a clerk key 3 Enter the clerk code to delete Text Parameter Clerk code max 4 digits 0001 to 9999 CLERK CODE The entry of 0 disables the use of contact less clerk keys The confirmation window is displayed to perform the deletion select YES to cancel the deletion select NO 4 To terminate the programming touch the
251. rom the list touch the LIST key and select the employee Enter the date of editing the working time then touch the ENTER key or the CONTINUE key The working time data window is displayed EMPLOYEE3 10 01 2003 1324 BACK SPACE 1327 ES EXIT 4 Select the line to edit the time then enter a correct time and touch the ENTER key To finish the editing job touch the EXIT key 119 H Employee s working time shift This function enables you to control the employees working time shifts Working time shifts of a day are divided into a maximum of nine You can also use this function to control CCD entries forcing the employees to make those entries at this operation CCD per shift In case the shift 2 MORNINGO2 is shifted to the shifts LUNCH 6 00 9 00 9 00 11 00 11 00 14 00 14 00 16 00 16 00 19 00 19 00 23 00 MORNINGO1 SHIFT 1 MORNINGO2 SHIFT2 LUNCH SHIFT3 AFTERNOON 4 EVENING SHIFT5 NIGHT SHIFT6 Key Operation WORK_CHANGE WORK_CHANGE In this example SHIFT7 to 9 are not used Touch the WORK CHANGE key to move the current shift to the next one When the shift reaches the last one SHIFT6 in this example it returns to the SHIFT1 Display WORKING TIME WORKING TIME MORNINGOZ 0 00 v WORKING TIME UUL WORKING TIME LUNCH 0 00 e use this function the employee must assign their wo
252. s 0 to 999999 PRICE LEVEL Price level LEVEL1 to LEVEL8 PLU EAN code in the bottles PLU EAN 1 PLU code max 5 digits EAN code 6 13 digits 0 PLU EAN code in the bottles PLU code 5 digits EAN code 6 13 digits 0 217 EAN to PLU converting table ARTICLE gt EAN PLU CONVERT PGM2 EAN code 6 13 digits 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the ARTICLE button to display the menu and touch the EAN PLU CONVERT button to display the convert list 3 Touch or enter the EAN number and touch the ENTER key to program the convert table 4 Enter the PLU code and touch the ENTER key Repeat steps 3 4 satisfactorily 5 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter PLU CODE PLU code max 5 digits 0 ITF to PLU converting table ARTICLE gt ITF PLU CONVERT PGM2 ITF code more less 14 digits or 16 digits 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the ARTICLE button to display the menu and touch the ITF PLU CONVERT button to display the convert list 3 Touch or enter the ITF code and touch the ENTER key to program the convert table 4 Enter the PLU code and touch the ENTER key Repeat steps 3 4 satisfactorily 5 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter PLU CODE PLU
253. s PGM2 mode 3PGM2 BRANCHES Report type Branch 00000001 Branch 00000007 NAME 00000026 26 319 Transfer mask PGM2 mode 2 PG TRANSFER MASK MASK NO 01 Report type Mask no Device configuration PGM2 mode PGN2 DEVICE CONFIG roy TH O00 CH1 RECEIPT REPORT PRINTER TROOO CHI ER O1PU PRE PRINT 0 YES BILL PRINTER 000 1 ER 01PU 00 99 ONE SHEET KPT TRO00 C 3 TH T88 3 T88 4 i ADDITION 00 SORT RCPT CUTTING NO SEQUENTIAL PRINT NO KP 2 ges KP 3 an KP 5 NON La E KP 8 BCR SCANNER C 3 71 000 48005 ONLINE Cid POLE DISPLAY 000 320 Report type Device name Terminal no Channel no Head logo print Minimum length for bill on receipt Auto cutter Initial slip feed line no Maximum line no of slip printing No of times of VP Model no of printer Initial KP feed line no Channel no Data bit Stop bit Parity Baud rate Waiting time Direct key PGM2 mode 2 DIRECT KEY HOME 001 002 003 004 ERR x en yo 2 T be a ET 055 056 057 moun 058 059 060 L1 P003 L200 3 L 5 L LT LB LQ HO 061 LI P0 L2 L3 L4
254. s data at a programmed speed 115200bps Sends data at 115200 bps 57600bps Sends data at 57600 bps SPEED 38400bps Sends data at 38400 bps 19200bps Sends data at 19200 bps 9600bps Sends data at 9600 bps 4800bps Sends data at 4800 bps 2400bps Sends data at 2400 bps 288 On line configuration programming ONLINE CONFIG PGM2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the ONLINE CONFIG button to program details 3 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 3 satisfactorily 4 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter TERMINAL No 6 digits 0 to 999999 000001 SENSING Sensing of the Cl signal CISIGNAL NON Non sensing of the CI signal Transmission line form LINE FORM HALF Half duplex system FULL Full duplex system Transmission data rate Baud rate 115200 bps 57600 bps BAUD RATE 38400 bps 19200 bps 9600 bps 4800 bps 2400 bps START CODE Start code 3 digits 0 to 127 002 END CODE End code digits 0 to 127 013 TIME OUT Time out time 3 digits 1 to 255 sec 007 AT OPEN STORE At command with open store max 50 characters null AT CLOSE STORE At command with close store max 50 characters null 289 VMP configuration programming VMP CONFIG PGM2 1 Select the PG
255. satisfactorily 4 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter CHANNEL 0 5 O means no RS 232 channel is assigned Transmission data rate Baud rate BAUD RATE 19200 bps 9600 bps 4800 bps DATA BITS 8 bits NON Non parity PARITY ODD Odd parity EVEN Even parity STOP BIT TR 2 bits 282 SCALE DEVICE CONFIG gt SCALE PGM2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the DEVICE CONFIG button to display the menu and touch the SCALE button to program details 3 Select the required programming item and enter or select each parameter then touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 3 satisfactorily 4 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter CHANNEL 0 5 O means RS 232 channel is assigned On line DEVICE CONFIG gt ONLINE PGM2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the DEVICE CONFIG button to display the menu and touch the ONLINE button to program details 3 Select the required programming item and enter or select each parameter then touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 3 satisfactorily 4 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter CHANNEL 0 5 O means RS 232 channel is assigned 283 Pole display DEVICE
256. se level 58 2 dB A Measured according to EN ISO 7779 2001 Maximum value if the optional cash drawer springs open 77 5 dB A Gerauschpegel 58 2 dB A Gemessen nach EN ISO 7779 2001 Spitzenwert bei Aufspringen der optionalen Kassenschublade 77 5 dB A Niveau de bruit 58 2 dB A Mesur selon la norme EN ISO 7779 2001 Valeur de cr te l ouverture du tiroir caisse en option 77 5 dB A Nivel de ruido 58 2 dB A Medido conforme a EN ISO 7779 2001 Valor m ximo al abrir el caj n opcional de la caja 77 5 dB A SHARP SHARP ELECTRONICS Europe GmbH Postbox 105504 20038 Hamburg Germany SHARP CORPORATION UP3515V_MIE10
257. splayed Select the proper operation from the menu e When the CREATE NEW DIRECT KEY is selected the key type window is displayed Select the key size SINGLE 2X2 HORIZONTAL DOUBLE HORIZONTAL TRIPLE VERTICAL DOUBLE and program the key contents e When the EDIT KEY CONTENT is selected the key contents window is displayed program the key contents e When the DELETE THIS KEY is selected the required key is deleted 5 To finish the programming touch the EXIT key lt Key contents gt PLU CODE Text Parameter LEVEL1 PLU code max 5 digits LEVEL 2 PLU code max 5 digits LEVEL10 PLU code max 5 digits DEPT CODE Text Parameter DEPT CODE Dept code max 2 digits 223 Discount key 1 through 9 FUNCTIONS gt PGM2 or PGM1 1 Select the PGM1 or PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the FUNCTIONS button to display the menu and touch the button to display the key list 3 Select the key to program each key 4 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 4 satisfactorily 5 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter AMOUNT Discount amount max 6 digits 0 TEXT Description for the discount key Up to 12 characters can be entered Programming of the or
258. t counter and total Non turnover 1 counter and total Non turnover 2 counter and total Non turnover 3 counter and total Report title per yo es DIA 7 0010 DT 14 x38 06 MAN TL 7 0000 i 38 06 DIS 3 000 OPT 15 4 51 OMEN T 4 51 EE 016 5 0000 097 16 M 25 4 25 EE DI7 5001 DPT 17 8 60 M sob 8 60 dd DIS 4001 27 18 11 92 WEIL 40000 11 92 NR DIS 3 0000 027 19 49 79 Wo ub 9 79 mE D20 2000 DPT 20 10 93 Ms 2000 10 93 TRANSACTION 1 30 00 2 10 070 3 204 170 gt 4 20 2 24 1 10 10 x2 10 5M x3 10 2 14 x4 10 2 28 NET 1 x3148 28 1 M c m Subtotal counter and total Subtotal counter and total Net sales total DIFFER 0 00 Ti Memory of difference due to rounding 1 TAXI ST 4974 41 Taxable 1 subtotal VAT 1 67 98 VAT 1 total TAK2 ST 1213 53 VAT 2 x37 09 ao ieee EE E Cup II TAX6 ST 518 12 VAT 6 15 03 TIL TAK 189 50 Tax total CC TAXI ST 118 70 Credit customer taxable 1 subtotal CC VAT 1 8 28 Credit customer VAT 1 total CC TAX6 ST 100 30 CC VAT 6 2 02 c TIL TAX 25 0 Credit customer tax total NET 3533 69 Net sales total without VAT VAT SFT 414 90 VAT shift total TAX DELE 4
259. t amount for the redeemed points max 5 digits 0 228 Cash key MEDIA gt CASH PGM2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the MEDIA button to display the menu and touch the CASH button to display the cash key list 3 Select the cash key to program details 4 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTERI key Repeat this step 4 satisfactorily 5 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter TEXT Description for the cash key Up to 12 characters can be entered A Significant digit for HALO 1 through 9 HALO B Number of zeros to follow the significant digit for HALO 0 through 8 AB is the same as A x 108 COMPULSORY Makes bill printing compulsory BILL PRINT NON COMPULSORY Makes bill printing non compulsory FOOTER PRINT This item decides whether or not your POS terminal should print a message at the foot of a receipt when a specified cash key is used YES Enables footer printing on the receipt NO Disables footer printing on the receipt NAME amp ADDRESS Threshold amount to prompt the name and address entry max 8 digits 0 to 99999999 AMOUNT ENTRY You may select compulsory or non compulsory amount tender COMPULSORY Compulsory amount tendered entry NON COMPULSORY Non compulsory amount tendered entry You can make the non add code en
260. t mode holds the current PLU EAN price level until touching a price level shift key e Automatic return mode for price shifts If your terminal has been programmed for PLU EAN price level in the automatic return mode touch a desired Price level shift key before a numeric entry Procedure Each item PRICE SHIFT1 through PRICE SHIFT8 gt PLU EAN entry Return to level 1 Price level no 1 10 gt PRICE_SHIFT PLU EAN entry gt Return to level 1 Each transaction PRICE SHIFT1 through PRICE SHIFT8 gt PLU EAN entry gt Finalization Return to level 1 Price level no 1 10 gt PRICE_SHIFT gt PLU EAN entry Finalization Return to level 1 e Lock shift mode for PLU levels If your terminal has been programmed for PLU EAN price level in the lock shift mode touch a desired price level shift key before a numeric entry Procedure PRICE SHIFT1 through PRICE SHIFT8 gt PLU EAN entry Stay in the current level Price level no 1 10 gt PRICE_SHIFT PLU EAN entry Stay in the current level 54 GT When the POS terminal has been programmed for the automatic return mode by one item Key Operation Display Price level 1 PLU 00001 Price level 2 gt PRICE SHIFT2 PLU 00001 Price level 1 gt PLU 00002 1x2 00 2 00 CASH TOTAL PLU00001 1x1 00 1 00 100002 CASH 4 00 4 00
261. t price gt AMOUNT code gt DEPT e Q ty Up to 4 digits integer digits decimal e Unit price Less than a programmed upper limit e Q ty x unit price Up to 8 digits e Direct PLU entries Procedure FF method for speedy entries For preset only type Q ty gt Direct PLU key For open and preset type preset price entry Q ty Direct PLU key lt Normal method gt For preset only type Q ty gt X QTY Direct PLU key For open only type Q ty gt X QTY gt Unit price Direct PLU key For open and preset type open price entry Q ty X QTY gt Unit price Direct PLU key For open and preset type preset price entry Q ty X QTY Direct PLU key e Q ty Up to 4 digits integer 3 digits decimal e Open unit price Within the programmed upper limit e Q ty x unit price Up to 8 digits e PLU code entries Procedure For preset only type Q ty gt X QTY PLU code PLU_EAN For open only type Q ty gt X QTY gt Unit price AMOUNT gt PLU code PLU EAN For open and preset type open price entry Q ty gt X QTY Unit price AMOUNT PLU code PLU_EAN For open and preset type preset price entry Q ty gt X QTY PLU code PLU_EAN e PLU code max 5 digits e Q ty Up to 4 digits integer digits decimal e Open unit price W
262. t print the details of intermediate GLU reading on the slip YES Prints the details of intermediate GLU reading on the slip INTERMEDIATE RCPT NO Does not print the details of intermediate GLU reading on the receipt YES Prints the details of intermediate GLU reading on the receipt EDITING PRINT NO Does not print the same articles DEPT PLU EAN collectively YES Prints the same articles DEPT PLU EAN collectively CUSTOMER ADDRESS NO Does not print customer addresses on the receipt YES Prints customer addresses on the receipt 257 Printing selection 2 OPTIONAL gt PRINT SELECT2 PGM2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the OPTIONAL button to display the menu and touch the PRINT SELECT2 button to program details 3 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 3 satisfactorily 4 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter SEPARATOR LINE YES Prints separator lines in the report NO Creates one line space instead of printing separator lines in the report LINK PLU PARENT TTL Prints parent PLU text of linked PLUs with totalizer EACH PLU Prints each PLU text of linked PLUs FREE TEXT ON KP YES Prints free text on KP NO Does not print free text on KP ITEM CODE ON KP YES Prints item code on KP
263. t window is displayed 2 Touch the NEW key the text entry window is displayed and enter the folder code max 8 digits to create To create the file folder touch the OK key To cancel the operation touch the CANCEL key Data saving The sales data EJ data or programming data can be saved to the SD card Procedure 1 Select the SAVING menu in the SD CARD mode the selection window SAVE ONLY or SAVE 8 CLEAR is displayed 1 SAVE ONLY For only data saving 2 SAVE amp CLEAR For data saving with memory clear Select the operation SAVE ONLY or SAVE amp CLEAR the following data list window is displayed Text Data list SALES DATA Sales data EJ DATA Electronic journal data T LOG DATA T LOG data file Select the individual programming data DEPARTMENT PLU EAN DYNAMIC EAN PLU MENU KEY LINK PLU TABLE CONDIMENT TABLE PLU CONVERT CRATE TABLE PROMOTION TABLE COMBO MEAL EAN NON PLU PRESS CODE PLU INFORMATION INDIVIDUAL PROGRAMMING DATA TRANSACTION TRAINING TEXT CLK CLERK CASHIER MANAGER OTHER PRESET DIRECT KEY FUNCTION MENU FUNCTION KEY MESSAGE DEVICE CONFIG TAX CUSTOMER VMP ID ALL PROGRAMMING DATA All programming data CUSTOMER NAME LIST Customer name list 2 Select the data menu from the list the confirmation window is displayed To save the required data file touch the OK key To cancel the operation touch the CANCEL key 324 E Data l
264. tatus Key Operation Print PLU 00002 1 r aie 222 3 X QTY PLU 00001 1 Print onthe Gee v2 60 journal cash 14 CASH_TOTAL For receipting RCPT 1x 4 50 4 50 00002 Print on the J 3x 3 20 9 60 receipt 00001 CASH 14 10 COPY is printed on the copy receipt COPY 1x 4 50 34 50 PLUOOO02 3x 3 20 9 60 00001 CASH 14 10 130 Guest Check Copy You can use this function when you want to make a copy of a guest check Touch the GC COPY key and make the desired entry Procedure GC COPY gt Item entries Finalization gt BILL RCPT The operation is the same as normal entry But the validation printing is disabled and the drawer does not open Key Operation Print G C COPY xG C COPY 10 X QTY PLU 00001 10x 3 20 32 00 CASH TOTAL CASH 32 Validation Printing Function The POS terminal can perform validation printing when it is connected with the slip printer For the details of slip printer contact your authorized SHARP dealer 1 Set a validation slip to the slip printer 2 Touch the VP key The validation printing will start Programmed compulsory validation printing can be overridden by performing the following operation If you need this function contact your authorized SHARP dealer CANCEL 131 Barcode Printing This function is used to print a barcode which e
265. ted from the list touch the CREDIT_ORDER key without a customer code to display the list Then select the customer and touch the ENTER key The order record is appeared Skip to the next step 2 To cancel the operation touch the CANCEL key CREDIT CUSTOMER 2 Select the order record and touch the RECORD DELETE key The confirmation message is displayed To delete the order select YES To cancel the deletion select NO To cancel the operation touch the CANCEL key 93 H Article order masks To use this function please consult your SHARP authorized dealer Article order masks are basically the data entry forms of orders to be sent from the POS terminal to the headquarters They are also used for the forms of merchandise returns inventories delivery notes etc There are two types of article order masks order masks and universal masks You can create up to 25 masks mask no 1 to 25 in total The first five of them are used for order masks and the rest are used for universal masks e Order masks Order masks are mainly used to send orders to the headquarters Mask no 1 to 5 are reserved for order masks In an order mask you can program orders the number of deliveries a day One delivery is called For example 100 sandwiches are delivered at 6 a m as TOUR1 200 sandwiches at 11 a m as TOUR2 and 50 sandwiches at 3 p m as TOUR3 The mask data article codes texts and order proposals a
266. ter Power source Official nominal voltage and frequency Power consumption 65 W max When the official voltage is 220 to 240V 50Hz 60Hz Working temperature 0 to 40 C Electronics LSI CPU etc Built in battery Rechargeable battery pack memory holding time of about 1 month with fully charged built in battery pack at 25 C Display Type TFT color LCD with backlighting Analog touch key Size 381 mm full screen Resolution 1024 x 768 dots Accessories Basic User Manual 1 copy AC adapter 1 AC power cord 1 Foot supporter 4 Support sheet 4 Rubber foot 4 Screw M4 x 25 4 Screw M3 x 8 1 Ferrite core for LAN cable 1 Please keep this accessory Contact your authorized SHARP dealer for intallation Nylon clamp 1 Specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice for improvement 333 CAUTION Shielded interface cables must be used with this equipment to maintain compliance with EMC regulations VORSICHT Zur Gewahrleistung der elektromagnetischen Vertraglichkeit EMV Vorschriften mussen bei diesem Gerat geschirmte Schnittstellenkabel verwendet werden ATTENTION Les cables d interface blind s doivent tre utilis s avec cet quipement pour maintenir la conformit aux normes EMC PRECAUCI N En este equipo deber n utilizarse cables blindados de interconexi n para respetar las normas de interferencias electromagn ticas Noi
267. ter rer eee rere eee eee eee eee terre rere reer ee ee eee eee eee eee Combo meal table m HH Link PLU EAN table HH PLU condiment table Promotion table global individual type eee ee EE eee eee eee eee eee eee eee teeter EE EE EE eee reer eee reer ere eee retry 215 Crate table HII 217 EAN to PLU converting table mmm 218 ITF to PLU converting table mmm 218 EAN Non PLU code format m HH Hmmm 219 Press code for EAN 220 Scale table IP 221 PLU EAN StOCK mm 221 EAN delete RUE ON eee RORIS soe OO Do 222 Direct key ano 223 Discount key 1 through 9 dete coadcanean a PI EE CEI TACE A e EN Ne e e 224 Percent key 1 through 969 RPI O IRE E EO ED EE ELEC EL EE RE ELE TS EOS 224 Group discount key GDSC 1 through GDSC Q mme 225 COMMISSION n n enne nie edente ie te kaw n aa nw ek inea eoa iban a inna a Doanh nua aduana nau 225 Miscellaneous functions deposit RA PO cash tip non cash tip cash in drawer check change emen eene 226 Service charge OPIDO S T L E TEO 227 Bonus points Raa eee 228 229 key
268. the CLK key When you insert a supervisor clerk key and open an existing guest check the original clerk who usually controls the guest check will automatically be assigned e This function is unavailable when the overlapped clerk function is enabled e When the supervisor clerk and the original clerk are entered the operation in OPXZ X1 Z1 X2 22 PGM1 or PGM2 mode is inhibited To open an existing guest check Inserting a supervisor clerk key Clerk code CLK When working outside guest check or opening a new guest check GT When opening a new guest check GLU code 1010 with this function Key Operation Display Inserting a supervisor clerk key Clerk 12 1 CLK 00001 1010 GLU 196 20 6 20 PLU 00002 PLUDOOO6 NBAL 1x1 00 1 00 PLUOOOO2 10 70 If it is programmed to display the clerk popup window CLERK POPUP FUNC SELECT2 menu you can start the operation from a GLU code entry After you touch the GLU key the popup window will open for a clerk entry GT When receiving payment for the order stored the GLU code 1010 Key Operation Display Inserting a supervisor clerk key Clerk 12 DIETSE go 1010 GLU 00001 NBAL 1x6 20 6 20 PLUDOOO6 1x1 00 1 00 00002 apil 10 70 125 Overlapped Clerk Entry This function allows you to switch from one clerk to another clerk and to
269. the DEPOSIT_REFUND key You cannot attempt to refund an amount larger than the deposit balance Procedure CASH TOTAL or CASH n n 2 5 __ Deposit amount k max 8 digits T 2 5 DEPOSIT_REFUND CREDIT n n 1 9 Key Operation Display 1001 GLU GLUFT OUT 5000 DEPOSIT CASH CASH_TOTAL DEPOSIT 50 00 NBAL 30 00 Key Operation Display 1001 GLU LUrTOO01 5000 DEPOSIT REFUND CASH CASH_TOTAL DEPOSIT 50 00 NBAL CASH DEPO 30 00 0 00 74 Transferring guest check out or in Transfer out in Open guest checks can be transferred from a clerk to another clerk This function may be convenient at the end of a clerk shift or whenever a clerk is relieved It is possible to transfer one several or all open tables The clerk who has served the table must be signed on e Transferring guest check out Procedure TRANS OUT OPENED_GLU Select the GLU code W a ENTER TRANS_OUT I Touch the GLU code e Enter the GLU code gt ENTER gt Enter the GLU code GLU When all open GLU codes of the active clerk are transferred For the next guest check Key Operation Print TRANS_OUT aoe 1001 GLU GLU 1001 TRANS OUT 9 60 e Transferring guest check in When the second clerk is assigned to be responsible for guest c
270. the ENTER key to program characters 4 Enter characters and touch the OK key 5 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key No Default text Classification Note 1 DISCOUNT Promotion discount max 12 characters 2 DIFFER Difference 3 TAX1 ST Taxable 1 subtotal 4 TAX2 ST Taxable 2 subtotal 5 TAX3 ST Taxable 3 subtotal 6 TAX4 ST Taxable 4 subtotal 7 TAX5 ST Taxable 5 subtotal 8 TAX6 ST Taxable 6 subtotal 9 VAT 1 VAT tax 1 10 VAT2 VATItax 2 11 VAT 3 VAT tax 3 12 4 VATItax 4 13 VAT 5 VAT tax 5 14 VAT 6 VAT tax 6 15 NET1 Net 1 16 NET2 Net 2 17 CP PLU Coupon like PLU 18 VD Void issued order receipt 19 SBTL VD Subtotal void 20 MGR VD MGR void 21 VOID Void mode 22 REFUND Refund 23 RETURN Return 24 HASH VD Hash void issued order receipt 25 HASH RF Hash refund 26 HASH RT Hash return 27 NOTURNVD Non turnover void 28 NOTURNRF Non turnover refund 29 NOTURNRT Non turnover return 30 VAT SFT VAT shift 31 TAX DELE VAT tax delete 32 VP CNT VP counter 33 BILL CNT Bill counter 34 NO SALE No sale 35 G C CNT Guest check counter 237 No Default text Classification Note 36 PBAL PB
271. tion is convenient for matching several PLU EAN items and selling them in a lump e g value meal etc Operation is the same as for normal PLU EAN The promotion table consists of the text for the table a maximum of 25 objected items selected from PLU EAN department or group trip levels the number of entries to be satisfied for each item promotion type and promotion detail The promotion detail depends on the promotion type In the example below percent discount is used as the promotion type The programmed promotion entry will be made under the following condition e The quantities of each of the objected items meet the corresponding trip levels programmed in the promotion table Objected items of table no 2 Item A 3 00 Item B 2 50 Item C 2 10 Trip levels for each item Item A 1 Item B 1 Item C 2 Promotion type Percent discount Promotion detail Percent rate 40 0096 Sale 1 Sale 2 Item A 3 00 Item A 3 00 Item B 2 50 Item A 3 00 Item C 2 10 Item B 2 50 Item C 2 10 Item C 2 10 Subtotal 9 70 Subtotal 10 60 Discount 3 88 Discount 0 00 lt Discount is not allowed Total 5 82 Total 10 60 Q ty of the item C should be two Cam In the case of lt Sale 1 gt above Key Operation Display Treated as 3 00 item PLU 00040 Treated as 2 50 item PLU 00041 12 10 2 10 Treated as 2 10 item PLU 00042 1 PLU00042 Treated as 2 10 item PLU 00042 1x2 10 2 10
272. to enter the ITFcode FUNCTION Item correction add H Item correction delete REFUND Refund item RETURN Return item WASTE Waste mode Yo Yo n Discount or markdown by fixed rate n 1 9 in Discount or markdown by amount n 1 9 GROUP DISCOUNT GROUP_DISC nn Group discount nn 01 10 GROUP DISCOUNT SHIFT GR DISC_SHIFT n Group discount shift n 1 10 FREE TEXT TEXT nn Free text fixed number nn 01 99 TEXT Free text specified number RA Received on account RA2 Received on account 2 PO Paid out 2 Paid out 2 NO SALE No sale Non add code Continued G C COPY Guest check copy 21 Classification Description Function PAYMENT CASH_TOTAL Cash CASH CASH n Cash n 2 5 CHECK CHECK Check CHECK n Check n 2 5 CREDIT CREDIT n Credit n 1 9 EXCHANGE EXCH Used to creates a subtotal in foreign currency n 1 9 CASH_TIP Used to enter the cash tip NONCASH TIP Used to enter the non cash tip TIP PAID Used to execute the tip paid function VAT Used to enter the manual VAT VATSFT ITEM Used to enter the VAT shift for item VATSFT TRANS Used to enter the VAT shift for transaction S
273. torily 4 To terminate the programming touch the CANCEL or EXIT key Text Parameter Payee name Max 21 characters X 2 lines Payee name for the English check H Entertainment bill message MESSAGE gt E BILL MESSAGE PGM2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the MESSAGE button to display the menu and touch the E BILL MESSAGE button to program details 3 Enter the validation printing text and touch the OK key Repeat this step 3 satisfactorily 4 To terminate the programming touch the CANCEL or EXIT key Text Parameter Entertainment bill message Max 30 characters 275 Scrolling message for pole display MESSAGE gt SCROLL PLOE DISP PGM2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the MESSAGE button to display the menu and touch the SCROLL PLOE DISP button to program details 3 Enter the validation printing text and touch the OK key Repeat this step 3 satisfactorily 4 To terminate the programming touch the CANCEL or EXIT key Text Parameter Scrolling message for pole display Max 64 characters E Scrolling message for main display MESSAGE gt SCROLL MAIN DISP PGM2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the MESSAGE button to display the menu and to
274. total NOTURNRT 1 x1 20 Non turnover item return counter and total VP CNT 0 Validation print counter BILL CNT 10 Bill print counter NO SALE 2 Q No sale exchange counter 15 Q PBAL counter 3NBAL 120 NBAL counter G C CNT 2 0 Guest check counter GUEST 149 0 Guest counter 149 e A n elitis Order total Paid total Paid total average per guest Order total paid total Vip 1 sale Vip 2 sale Vip 3 sale Trans out counter and total Trans in counter and total Bill balance Trans out trans in counter and total Starting cash memory Starting cash memory Starting cash memory total Received on account counter and total Received on account counter and total Received on account counter and total Paid out counter and total Check cashing counter and total Deposit counter and total ORDER TL 3798 19 PAID TL 3693 69 AVE 24 19 0 104 50 VIPI SALE 9 90 VIP2 SALE 20 20 VIP3 SALE 25 40 TRAN OUT 20 750 TRAN IN 1Q 92 70 BILL BAL 10 2480 SCH 2513 80 SCH 43 86 SCH TTL 2469 94 HARA 50 66 26 eR 20 29 29 20 0 75 9 20 1 05 ep 40 2 00 02 20 6 10 CA CHK 10 x3 00 CA CHKS 1 2 00 DEPOSIT 10 5000 DEPO 10 10 00 CASH TIP 40 3 00 NOCA TIP 20 5 00
275. tre rere rere EE eee ee eee eee eee teeter er rere rere eee eee ee eee eee rere er er eter errr reer eee eee eerie 9 Operator display touch panel 9 Customer display eee eee eee eee eee eee eee EE EE rere eee EN OO ee ee eee eee eee EE EE EE EE EN ee eee eee ee eee ere eee teeta 12 Screen save mode eee 12 Clerk keys eee eee eee EE EE eee eee eee eee eter eer ee rere EE rere reer eee eee etree tere rr eter eee ee eee eee eee eee teeter err ere EE EE rere eee eee eee ee 13 2 Before Operating the POS Terminal cnn rr 14 Display Adjusttment eee eee eee eee eee eee eee ee eee teeter eee eee eee ee ee ee eee eee ere rer rer etree eee eee ee eee eee ete eter eer reer eter rere ee 14 Connecting the Printer and Installing the Paper ttt tt treet eee 14 3 Selecting an Operating Mode e HII 15 Operating lt PEE 15 Mode Selection Hehe 16 Selecting PD 16 4 Prior to Making Entries o m HH 17 Preparations for Entries Hee 17 Error Warning I EE EE EE EE OO OO OO EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EN OO EE EE EE EE EK EE EE EE KE OO 17 Entering a Secret Code e Hee 18 5 Entries coo n m m 19 Function Key Description eee eee eee eee eee eee eee ee tee tee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee ree Tere eee eee ee eee eee eee cere eter errr ere reer ere 19 Screen
276. try compulsory when a cash entry is accepted NON ADD COMPULSORY Compulsory non add code entry NON COMPULSORY Non compulsory non add code entry VP COMPULSORY Compulsory validation printing NON COMPULSORY Non compulsory validation printing DRAWER OPEN YES Opens the drawer NO Disables the drawer opening Change selection CHANGE SELECT BY TICKET BY CASH Retention on closed transaction file CLOSED TRANSACTION RETAINED NO RETAINED 229 Check key MEDIA gt CHECK 2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the MEDIA button to display the menu and touch the CHECK button to display the check key list 3 Select the check key to program details 4 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTER key Repeat this step 4 satisfactorily 5 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter TEXT Description for the check key Up to 12 characters can be entered A Significant digit for HALO 1 through 9 HALO B Number of zeros to follow the significant digit for HALO 0 through 8 AB is the same as A x 108 COMPULSORY Makes bill printing compulsory BILL PRINT NON COMPULSORY Makes bill printing non compulsory FOOTER PRINT This item decides whether or not your POS terminal should print a message at the foot of a receipt when a s
277. ts after item entry please contact your authorized SHARP dealer Key Operation Display 2 TEXT PLU 00003 PLU 00001 11 00 1 00 CASH_TOTAL PLU00003 1 1x1 00 1 00 CASH 2 00 2 00 98 Payment Treatment B Tip in entries Your POS terminal allows the entry of tips that your guests give to clerks in cash or other media check or credit The tip in entry assumes that it is carried out in the following system Tip paid by a guest to a clerk is entered in the POS terminal by tip entry and the restaurant pays the tip amount to the clerk later in cash e Tip amount entry to the POS terminal is normally performed by a clerk The entry is allowed before payment operation is performed After the tip entry is performed item entry is not allowed The transaction operation must be finalized by payment operation Two types of tip cash tip and non cash tip are not allowed to be mixed in entry during one transaction operation Tip entry only in either of them is allowed Cash tip entry In a transaction in which cash tip entry is made when payment operation is started the process is as follows Cash tender which may be foreign money is compulsory until total cash tender exceeds or equals to cash tip amount Then check or credit tender operation is allowed Non cash tip entry In a transaction in which non cash tip entry is made when payment operation is started the process is as follows Check
278. uch the SCROLL MAIN DISP button to program details 3 Enter the validation printing text and touch the OK key Repeat this step 3 satisfactorily 4 To terminate the programming touch the CANCEL or EXIT key Text Parameter Scrolling message for main display Max 64 characters 276 Function menu key FUNCTION KEY gt FUNCTION MENU KEY 2 15 function keys be programmed to each of 30 function menu keys 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the FUNCTION KEY button to display the menu and touch the FUNCTION MENU KEY button to display the function menu key list 3 Select the function menu key from the list the job selection window TITLE PRESET KEY CONTENT PRESET is displayed TITLE PRESET To program the title text for each menu key Text Parameter TITLE PRESET Max 16 characters KEY CONTENT PRESET To program function keys for each menu key Select the function key position 1 to 15 the function key list is displayed and select the function key to assign Select the INHIBIT to delete the function key from each function menu Text Parameter Function key 1 Function menu key nn Function key 15 4 To finish the programming touch the EXIT key Function key text color FUNCTION KEY FUNCTION KEY 2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch
279. ull 8 digits number must be entered e Internal code flag 2 in store marking non PLU short type a cae a oe Program the format in EAN NON PLU in ARTICLE setting Free format 4 e Internal code flag 0 lt in store marking PLU short type gt Program the format in EAN NON PLU C For entry a full 8 digits number must be entered On the 0 6 Free code receipt journal non PLU type code is printed like 2083 3 3 3e 3 3 price quantity information 326 EAN 13 e Ordinary EAN 13 code used in the source marking kok y Poi o6 e Specific EAN 13 code flag 977 978 979 used in the source Makencode i tem code marking ISBM ISSN Nation code For entry you must enter a full of 13 digits number Internal code used in the in store marking the flag character poera ase ae fee 66 number 20 through 29 and 02 F Sa Program the format in EAN NON PLU in ARTICLE setting 02 20 29 Program the format in EAN NON PLU e EAN press code used for press articles For a press article you must use a 13 digits number EAN code plus a 2 digit or 5 digit add on code though your register can register 13 digits number EAN code without an add on code The format for press articles is decided unique by each country For the formats for other countries than the ones shown below please ask your authorized SHARP d
280. up to 8 digits e PLU code entries Procedure For preset only type Length X QTY Width X QTY PLU code PLU_EAN For open only type Length X QTY Width gt X QTY gt Unit price AMOUNT PLU code PLU_EAN For open and preset type open price entry Length X QTY Width X QTY Unit price AMOUNT PLU code PLU_EAN For open and preset type preset price entry Length X QTY gt Width X QTY PLU code PLU_EAN e Length or width Up to 4 digits integer 3 digits decimal e Unit price per m2 Less than a programmed upper limit e Length x Width x Unit price up to 8 digits 37 e EAN entries By scanning EAN code Length gt X QTY Width gt X QTY gt 69 Scan EAN code By EAN code entry Length X QTY Width X QTY EAN code PLU_EAN e Length or width Up to 4 digits integer 3 digits decimal e Length x Width x Unit price up to 8 digits e When you enter or scan an undefined code if the terminal is programmed for the learning function as yes you are required to enter its unit price and the associated department Undefined EAN entry Unit price ENTER Dept code ENTER Delete no delete selection ENTER eu Key Operation Display 3 X QTY 4 X QTY 500 Department 6 2 5 X QTY 5 X QTY 600 AMOUNT 5 DEPT 2 XIQ
281. ure EAN sales entries Procedure 1 Enter the EAN by undefined EAN code The following window will be displayed LEARNING ENTER PRICE 49017804385328 1 If the EAN code is entered by mistake touch the CANCEL key and enter the correct EAN code 2 Enter the price and touch the ENTER key The following window will be displayed LEARNING ENTER DEPT CODE 49017804385328 3 Enter the associated department number then select the delete method Select 1 AUTO DELETE when you want to exempt the EAN code entered from the non accessed EAN delete function deletion by selecting DELETE option from EAN DELETE menu in Z1 mode e When there is no capacity remained in the file the data is not stored in the file e For the text for the EAN code the text of its associated department is applied e You can use the EAN learning function in the training mode This may be convenient to practice the scanning system 45 H EAN ITF to PLU conversion EAN ITF to PLU conversion allows you to convert an EAN ITF code to a PLU code e Link an EAN ITF code to a PLU code in the EAN ITF to PLU converting table to use this function e Follow the same key procedure as for ordinary EAN entries e The item programmed in the converting table is registered as the linked PLU e EAN to PLU conversion Use this function to sell the same type of item marked with different EAN codes such as packs of cigarettes They have different EAN codes in
282. ut the key to the contactless clerk switch Contactless clerk key optional How to open the side cover While moving the side cover release lever towards you pull the side cover and rotate the cover upward as shown in the illustration at the right Side cover Side cover release lever located at the bottom cabinet Terminal Connection slot inside the side cover RS232 port SD card slot RS 232C CH5 RESET switch DO NOT move the reset switch unless instructed to do Doing so may damage or delete the data The application software will determine the usage and availability of the external port Displays This POS terminal is equipped with a color LCD operator display The operator display is a touch panel Operations can be performed by touching the screen that shows keys or items in the window of the operator display Operator display touch panel e Initial screen Screen example REG mode Information Status area Touch panel keyboard Receipt window Mode Clerk Screen name Level shift no PAGE PAGE Miki 0 0001 0001 me om E EZ ES EGZ AAAA Mad FE EE _s Terminal no Date Time Numeric entry An entered figure is appeared Product name Version no Function bar window ES E Information Status M L01 L10 P8 V R ri X Rec
283. xels or blank pixels may appear Occasionally an irregular colour or uneven brightness may occur depending on the display settings or the view angle Please note that this type of phenomena is common for LCDs and may not bea malfunction of the system The backlight in the display is a consumable part When the LCD display can no longer be adjusted and becomes darker you should replace the LCD module Consult your authorized SHARP dealer for further details Connecting the Printer and Installing the Paper Rolls This POS terminal can be configured with multiple types of printers For specific instructions related to the handling and care of the printer please refer to the applicable printer s instruction manual 14 Selecting an Operating Mode The POS terminal will display the following listing by touching the MODE key Mode selection window OO oo 1 OPX2 MODE 2 Kizzi MODE 3 X2 22 MODE E onon 8 SD CARD MODE EXIT UP 3515V Ver1 01 THOOU 15 14 43 Operating Mode You can select any mode other than REG from the list in the mode selection window Your POS terminal supports the following operating modes This mode allows you to enter various sales information The mode selection window REG mode does not list this mode To select this mode from the mode selection window touch the EXIT key OFF mode This mode locks all operations of the POS ter
284. y Du 250 Terminal programming roD 251 License programming wd Sasa eae Saale is So Sada dius re deuce 252 Date time programming e DRA be tale RECTE REPE 252 Function prohibition E ROLL e 253 Function selection 1 mm 255 Function selection 2 m nennen 256 Printing selection 1 eens betas cakes Soule Sahar dio aa Bib Er kin ka BID ID w eee 257 Printing selection 2 EM FA EMT AAT LE TIT TEIFI I EN TR NI 258 Display selection 259 EURO teste ei ene 259 260 General report format eene 261 Transaction report Jud ERE 262 Clerk report format emere 266 Department report format eem 269 Hourly report mme 269 Stacked report DT PI MEI CI Ne odie de Seve dae T DOLI OO CEP EDO 270 Receipt logo nennen 272 INC LI 273 Validation printing E 273 Bill header text m 274 Bill footer text m 274
285. y only NEW STOCK max 7 digits ADD Text Parameter CURRENT STOCK Current stock display only ADD max 7 digits SUBTRACT Text Parameter CURRENT STOCK Current stock display only SUB max 7 digits 221 EAN delete ARTICLE gt EAN DELETE 2 You can delete the EAN codes which not been accessed during the period you set in this program when you execute the delete job in EAN DELETE in X1 Z1 mode 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the ARTICLE button to display the menu and touch the EAN DELETE button to program the detail 3 Enter the delete period and touch the ENTER key 4 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key EAN DELETE Text Parameter Delete period PERIOD DAY Day 2 digits 01 to 99 00 00 No deleting 222 Direct key DIRECT KEY 2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch the DIRECT KEY button to display the screen list 3 Select the corresponding screen the SETTING COPY selection window is displayed To program the key select the SETTING When the SETTING is selected the keyboard screen is displayed If you want to copy another keyboard screen select COPY and select the proper screen 4 Touch the desired key position to program The CREATE NEW KEY EDIT KEY CONTENT DELETE THIS KEY menu is di
286. y the employee list 3 Select or enter the employee number and touch the ENTER key to program details 4 Touch the required programming item and enter or select each parameter and touch the ENTERI key Repeat this step 4 satisfactorily 5 To terminate the programming touch the EXIT key Text Parameter SECRET CODE Secret code max 4 digits 0001 to 9999 0000 Name for the employee NAME Up to 12 characters can be entered CLERK CODE Clerk code max 4 digits 0001 to 9999 0000 Manager code max 2 digits 01 to 99 00 MANAGER CODE The manager who is responsible or capable for adjustments to the employee s hours Standard number of hours for which the employee should work a day DISESRANORIS TIME max 3 digits 0 0 to 99 9 ENABLE Enables the working shift 1 WORKING SET DISABLE Disables the working shift 1 ENABLE Enables the working shift 2 WORKING SHIE T2 DISABLE Disables the working shift 2 ENABLE Enables the working shift 9 WORKING SHIFTS DISABLE Disables the working shift 9 LOCATION 1 Job location table number max 2 digits 01 to 99 00 LOCATION 2 Job location table number max 2 digits 01 to 99 00 LOCATION 7 Job location table number max 2 digits 01 to 99 00 248 Job location table PERSONNEL gt JOB LOCATE TBL PGM2 1 Select the PGM2 mode and touch the SETTING to perform the programming 2 Touch t

UP-3515 Operation-Manual GB

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents